Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 262

Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch

V100R006C01
Configuration Guide - Device
Management
Issue 01
Date 2011-10-26
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.






Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Intended Audience
This document provides the basic concepts, configuration procedures, and configuration
examples in different application scenarios of the device management feature supported by the
S9300.
This document describes how to configure the device management feature.
This document is intended for:
l Data configuration engineers
l Commissioning engineers
l Network monitoring engineers
l System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management About This Document
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ii
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }
*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by
vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.
[x | y | ... ]
*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by
vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
&<1-n> The parameter before the & sign can be repeated 1 to n times.
# A line starting with the # sign is comments.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all changes made in previous issues.
Changes in Issue 01 (2011-10-26)
Initial commercial release.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management About This Document
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 NAP Configuration.......................................................................................................................1
1.1 NAP Overview...................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Configuring NAP-based Remote Deployment...................................................................................................2
1.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.........................................................................................................2
1.2.2 Configuring and Starting the NAP Master Interface.................................................................................3
1.2.3 Remote Login............................................................................................................................................5
1.2.4 Disabling NAP on the Slave Device..........................................................................................................6
1.2.5 Checking the Configuration.......................................................................................................................6
1.3 Configuration Examples.....................................................................................................................................7
1.3.1 Example for Configuring NAP-based Remote Deployment in Static Mode.............................................8
1.3.2 Example for Configuring NAP-based Remote Deployment in Automatic Mode.....................................9
2 CSS Configuration......................................................................................................................12
2.1 CSS Overview..................................................................................................................................................13
2.2 CSS Features Supported by the S9300.............................................................................................................13
2.3 Configuring the CCS Function.........................................................................................................................16
2.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................17
2.3.2 Configuring Frame ID or Priority of the S9300......................................................................................18
2.3.3 (Optional) Specifying the Master Switch................................................................................................18
2.3.4 Enabling the CSS Function......................................................................................................................19
2.3.5 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................20
2.4 Configuration Examples...................................................................................................................................20
2.4.1 Example for Configuring a CSS..............................................................................................................20
3 Displaying the Device Status....................................................................................................23
3.1 Display Commands...........................................................................................................................................24
3.2 Displaying the Status of the S9300...................................................................................................................24
3.2.1 Displaying Information About the S9300...............................................................................................24
3.2.2 Displaying the Version............................................................................................................................25
3.2.3 Displaying the Power Status of the S9300..............................................................................................25
3.2.4 Displaying the Board Voltage.................................................................................................................26
3.2.5 Displaying the Temperature....................................................................................................................26
3.2.6 Displaying the Fan Status........................................................................................................................27
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management Contents
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iv
3.2.7 Displaying the CPU Usage......................................................................................................................27
3.2.8 Displaying the Memory Usage................................................................................................................29
3.2.9 Displaying the Environment Version......................................................................................................30
3.2.10 Displaying the Interface Status..............................................................................................................30
3.2.11 Displaying Electronic Labels.................................................................................................................32
3.2.12 Displaying Alarm Information..............................................................................................................33
3.2.13 Displaying Diagnostic Information.......................................................................................................34
3.2.14 Displaying the Health Status.................................................................................................................35
3.2.15 Displaying Information About a Transceiver on the Interface..............................................................36
4 Hardware Management..............................................................................................................38
4.1 Introduction to Hardware Management............................................................................................................39
4.2 Hardware Management Supported by the S9300.............................................................................................39
4.3 Powering On and Off the Board.......................................................................................................................39
4.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................39
4.3.2 Powering Off a Board..............................................................................................................................40
4.3.3 Powering On a Board..............................................................................................................................40
4.3.4 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................41
4.4 Backing Up Electronic Labels..........................................................................................................................41
4.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................41
4.4.2 Backing Up Electronic Labels.................................................................................................................42
4.5 Setting the Rotating Speed of a Fan.................................................................................................................42
4.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................43
4.5.2 Setting the Rotating Speed of a Fan........................................................................................................43
4.5.3 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................44
4.6 Setting the Upper and Lower Thresholds of the Temperature of the Fan Module...........................................44
4.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................44
4.6.2 Setting the Upper and Lower Temperature Thresholds for Fan Speed Adjustment................................45
4.6.3 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................45
4.7 Resetting the LPU.............................................................................................................................................46
4.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................46
4.7.2 Resetting the LPU....................................................................................................................................46
4.7.3 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................47
4.8 Resetting the Slave Main Control Board..........................................................................................................47
4.8.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................47
4.8.2 Resetting the Slave Main Control Unit....................................................................................................48
4.8.3 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................48
4.9 Configuring Master/Slave Switchover.............................................................................................................48
4.9.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................48
4.9.2 Enabling the Master/Slave Switchover....................................................................................................49
4.9.3 Performing Master/Slave Switchover......................................................................................................49
4.9.4 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................50
5 Information Center Configuration...........................................................................................51
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management Contents
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
5.1 Introduction to the Information Center.............................................................................................................52
5.2 Information Center Supported by the S9300....................................................................................................52
5.3 Enabling Log Output........................................................................................................................................58
5.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................58
5.3.2 Enabling the Information Center.............................................................................................................58
5.3.3 (Optional) Naming an Information Channel...........................................................................................59
5.3.4 (Optional) Configuring the Function of Filtering Logs by IDs...............................................................59
5.3.5 (Optional) Configuring the Function of Generating a Data Dictionary..................................................60
5.3.6 Outputting Logs to the Log Buffer..........................................................................................................60
5.3.7 Outputting Logs to a Log File.................................................................................................................61
5.3.8 Outputting Logs to the Console...............................................................................................................62
5.3.9 Outputting Logs to the Terminal.............................................................................................................62
5.3.10 Outputting Logs to the Log Host...........................................................................................................63
5.3.11 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................64
5.4 Enabling Alarm Output....................................................................................................................................66
5.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................66
5.4.2 Enabling the Information Center.............................................................................................................67
5.4.3 (Optional) Naming the Information Channel..........................................................................................67
5.4.4 Outputting Alarms to the Alarm Buffer..................................................................................................68
5.4.5 Outputting Alarms to the Log File..........................................................................................................69
5.4.6 Outputting Alarms to the Console...........................................................................................................69
5.4.7 Outputting Alarms to the Terminal.........................................................................................................70
5.4.8 Outputting Alarms to the SNMP Agent..................................................................................................71
5.4.9 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................72
5.5 Enabling the Output of Debugging Information...............................................................................................73
5.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................74
5.5.2 Enabling the Information Center.............................................................................................................74
5.5.3 (Optional) Naming the Information Channel..........................................................................................75
5.5.4 Outputting Debugging Information to the Log File................................................................................75
5.5.5 Outputting Debugging Information to the Console.................................................................................76
5.5.6 Outputting Debugging Information to the Terminal...............................................................................77
5.5.7 Outputting Debugging Information to the Log Host...............................................................................78
5.5.8 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................79
5.6 Maintaining Information Center.......................................................................................................................80
5.7 Information Center configuration Examples....................................................................................................80
5.7.1 Example for Outputting Logs to the Log File.........................................................................................80
5.7.2 Example for Outputting Logs to Log Hosts............................................................................................82
5.7.3 Example for Configuring Log Messages to be Output to the Log Host on the Public Network when the
Management VPN Instance Is used..................................................................................................................86
5.7.4 Example for Configuring Binary Logs to be sent to the Log Host..........................................................89
5.7.5 Example for Outputting Alarms to the SNMP Agent..............................................................................91
5.7.6 Example for Outputting the Debugging Information to the Console......................................................94
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management Contents
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vi
6 Mirroring Configuration............................................................................................................96
6.1 Introduction to Mirroring..................................................................................................................................97
6.2 Mirroring Features Supported by the S9300....................................................................................................97
6.3 Configuring Local Port Mirroring....................................................................................................................99
6.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................100
6.3.2 Configuring a Local Observing Port.....................................................................................................100
6.3.3 Configuring a Local Mirrored Port........................................................................................................101
6.3.4 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................101
6.4 Configuring Remote Port Mirroring...............................................................................................................101
6.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................102
6.4.2 Configuring a Remote Observing Port..................................................................................................102
6.4.3 Configuring a Remote Mirrored Port....................................................................................................103
6.4.4 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................103
6.5 Configuring Traffic Mirroring........................................................................................................................104
6.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................104
6.5.2 Configuring an Observing Port..............................................................................................................104
6.5.3 Configuring Complex Traffic Classification.........................................................................................105
6.5.4 Creating a Traffic Behavior...................................................................................................................105
6.5.5 Creating a Traffic Policy.......................................................................................................................106
6.5.6 Applying a Traffic Policy......................................................................................................................106
6.5.7 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................107
6.6 Configuration Examples.................................................................................................................................108
6.6.1 Example for Configuring Local Port Mirroring....................................................................................108
6.6.2 Example for Configuring Layer 2 Remote Port Mirroring....................................................................112
6.6.3 Example for Configuring Traffic Mirroring..........................................................................................114
7 PoE Power Supply Configuration..........................................................................................120
7.1 PoE Overview.................................................................................................................................................121
7.2 PoE Features Supported by the S9300...........................................................................................................121
7.3 Configuring PoE Functions............................................................................................................................121
7.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................122
7.3.2 Configuring the PoE Function Globally................................................................................................122
7.3.3 Configuring the PoE Function on an Interface......................................................................................124
7.3.4 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................126
7.4 Configuration Examples.................................................................................................................................127
8 ALS Configuration....................................................................................................................133
8.1 ALS Overview................................................................................................................................................134
8.2 ALS Features Supported by the S9300...........................................................................................................134
8.3 Configuring ALS............................................................................................................................................135
8.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................135
8.3.2 Enabling ALS on an Interface...............................................................................................................136
8.3.3 (Optional) Setting the Restart Mode of the Laser..................................................................................137
8.3.4 (Optional) Starting the Laser Manually.................................................................................................137
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management Contents
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
8.3.5 (Optional) Setting the ALS Pulse Interval and Width of the Laser.......................................................138
8.3.6 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................139
8.4 Configuration Examples.................................................................................................................................139
8.4.1 Example for Configuring ALS..............................................................................................................139
9 Rebooting....................................................................................................................................142
9.1 Process of Booting the S9300.........................................................................................................................143
9.2 Process of Booting the BootROM..................................................................................................................144
9.3 Process of Booting the System Software........................................................................................................145
9.4 Rebooting the S9300......................................................................................................................................146
9.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................146
9.4.2 (Optional) Rebooting the S9300 Through Command Lines.................................................................146
9.4.3 (Optional) Rebooting the S9300 Immediately by Pressing the Power Button......................................147
9.4.4 (Optional) Rebooting the S9300 on Schedule Using Command Lines.................................................147
9.4.5 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................148
10 ISSU Configuration.................................................................................................................149
10.1 Introduction to ISSU.....................................................................................................................................150
10.2 ISSU Supported by the S9300......................................................................................................................150
10.3 Implementing ISSU......................................................................................................................................151
10.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................151
10.3.2 (Optional) Configuring ISSU Precheck...............................................................................................151
10.3.3 (Optional) Configuring the Length of the ISSU Rollback Timer........................................................152
10.3.4 Implementing ISSU.............................................................................................................................152
10.3.5 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................156
10.4 Maintaining ISSU.........................................................................................................................................159
10.4.1 Monitoring the Running Status of ISSU..............................................................................................159
10.5 Configuration Examples...............................................................................................................................159
10.5.1 Example for Implementing ISSU........................................................................................................159
11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration....................................................................163
11.1 Overview of Ethernet Clock Syntonization..................................................................................................164
11.2 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Features Supported by the S9300.................................................................164
11.3 Forcibly Specifying a Reference Clock Source............................................................................................166
11.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................166
11.3.2 Forcibly Specifying a Reference Clock Source for the Main Control Board......................................167
11.3.3 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................168
11.4 Manually Specifying a Reference Clock Source..........................................................................................169
11.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................169
11.4.2 Manually Specifying a Reference Clock Source for the Main Control Board....................................170
11.4.3 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................171
11.5 Selecting a Clock Source Based on the Priority...........................................................................................171
11.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................171
11.5.2 Setting the Priority of a Clock Source.................................................................................................172
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management Contents
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
viii
11.5.3 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................173
11.6 Selecting the Clock Source Based on the SSM Quality Level.....................................................................174
11.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................174
11.6.2 Enabling the SSM Quality Level to Be Used in Clock Source Selection...........................................175
11.6.3 (Optional) Setting the SSM Quality Level of a Clock Source............................................................175
11.6.4 (Optional) Preventing Timing Loops Between BITS Interfaces.........................................................177
11.6.5 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................177
11.7 (Optional) Configuring Other Attributes of a Clock Source........................................................................177
11.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................178
11.7.2 Setting Clock Mode or Time Mode of a BITS Clock..........................................................................179
11.7.3 Setting the ID of a Clock Source.........................................................................................................179
11.7.4 Configuring Attributes of the S1 Byte.................................................................................................180
11.7.5 Setting the Priority of the Clock Signal That an Interface Sends to the Clock Board.........................181
11.7.6 Locking a Clock Source......................................................................................................................182
11.7.7 Configuring Frequency Offset Check..................................................................................................182
11.7.8 Setting the Delay Time for the System to Consider a Clock Source Lost...........................................183
11.7.9 Setting the WTR Time of a Clock Source...........................................................................................183
11.7.10 Enable the Permanent Holding Mode of the Clock Module.............................................................184
11.7.11 Configuring the Non-Retrieve Mode of the Clock Source................................................................184
11.7.12 Checking the Configuration...............................................................................................................185
11.8 Configuration Examples...............................................................................................................................186
11.8.1 Example for Selecting the Clock Source Based on the Priority..........................................................186
11.8.2 Example for Selecting the Clock Source Based on the SSM Quality Level.......................................191
11.8.3 Example for Selecting the Clock Source Based on the SSM Quality Level in Extended Mode.........196
12 PTP Configuration...................................................................................................................203
12.1 PTP Overview...............................................................................................................................................204
12.2 PTP Feature Supported by the S9300...........................................................................................................208
12.3 Configuring PTP for an OC..........................................................................................................................210
12.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................210
12.3.2 Configuring PTP Globally...................................................................................................................211
12.3.3 Configuring PTP for an Interface........................................................................................................212
12.3.4 Configuring Time Attributes for PTP Packets....................................................................................213
12.3.5 Configuring Encapsulation Types for PTP Packets............................................................................214
12.3.6 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................216
12.4 Configuring PTP for a BC............................................................................................................................217
12.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................217
12.4.2 Configuring PTP Globally...................................................................................................................218
12.4.3 Configuring PTP for an Interface........................................................................................................219
12.4.4 Configuring Time Attributes for PTP Packets....................................................................................220
12.4.5 Configuring Encapsulation Types for PTP Packets............................................................................220
12.4.6 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................223
12.5 Configuring PTP for a TC............................................................................................................................223
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management Contents
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
12.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................223
12.5.2 Configuring PTP Globally...................................................................................................................224
12.5.3 Configuring PTP for an Interface........................................................................................................225
12.5.4 Configuring Time Attributes for PTP Packets....................................................................................226
12.5.5 Configuring Encapsulation Types for PTP Packets............................................................................226
12.5.6 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................229
12.6 Configuring PTP for a TCandBC.................................................................................................................229
12.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................229
12.6.2 Configuring PTP Globally...................................................................................................................231
12.6.3 Configuring PTP for an Interface........................................................................................................231
12.6.4 Configuring Time Attributes for PTP Packets....................................................................................233
12.6.5 Configuring Encapsulation Types for PTP Packets............................................................................233
12.6.6 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................236
12.7 Configuring the PTP Clock Source..............................................................................................................236
12.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................236
12.7.2 Configuring BITS Signals to Participate in the BMC Calculation......................................................237
12.7.3 Configuring Attributes for the PTP Clock Source...............................................................................237
12.7.4 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................238
12.8 Maintaining PTP...........................................................................................................................................238
12.8.1 Clearing PTP Statistics........................................................................................................................238
12.8.2 Monitoring PTP...................................................................................................................................238
12.8.3 Debugging PTP....................................................................................................................................239
12.9 Configuration Examples...............................................................................................................................239
12.9.1 Example for Configuring the BITS as the PTP Master Clock Source................................................239
12.9.2 Example for Configuring Clock Synchronization Through Unicast UDP-Encapsulation 1588v2 Packets
in Pdelay Mechanism......................................................................................................................................242
12.9.3 Example for Configuring Clock Synchronization Through Multicast MAC-Encapsulation 1588v2
Packets in Delay Mechanism..........................................................................................................................247
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management Contents
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
x
1 NAP Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to configure the Neighbor Access Protocol (NAP) on the S9300.
1.1 NAP Overview
NAP is a Huawei proprietary protocol that implements remote configuration and deployment of
unconfigured devices. You can log in to an unconfigured device from a directly connected device
and configure the unconfigured device remotely through NAP.
1.2 Configuring NAP-based Remote Deployment
Using NAP, you can remotely log in to devices with empty configurations to implement remote
deployment.
1.3 Configuration Examples
This section provides upgrade and maintenance examples together with the configuration
flowchart. The configuration examples explain networking requirements, configuration notes,
and configuration roadmap.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1
1.1 NAP Overview
NAP is a Huawei proprietary protocol that implements remote configuration and deployment of
unconfigured devices. You can log in to an unconfigured device from a directly connected device
and configure the unconfigured device remotely through NAP.
Usually, a device is installed with only necessary software before delivery and no configuration
is made. Therefore, engineers must configure and commission new devices on site but cannot
log in to the devices remotely. This makes the deployment inconvenient and increases the costs
of project operation and delivery.
The Huawei Group Management Protocol (HGMP) implements remote configuration on Layer
2 networks and is applicable to Ethernet networks. NAP implements remote configuration on
Layer 3 networks. It establishes a temporary neighbor relationship between a configured device
and an unconfigured device that are directly connected through physical links. Then you can log
in to the unconfigured device from the configured device and configure the unconfigured device
remotely. NAP greatly reduces the costs of network operation, maintenance, and delivery.
1.2 Configuring NAP-based Remote Deployment
Using NAP, you can remotely log in to devices with empty configurations to implement remote
deployment.
Context
CAUTION
After the device with an empty configuration is powered on and started, you must make sure
that its interfaces connected to the devices on the current network are Up and support NAP;
otherwise, the function of NAP-based remote deployment cannot take effect.
1.2.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring NAP-based remote deployment, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
To deploy devices having empty configurations, you can use NAP to perform remote login to
the devices from a device in the current network. In this manner, you can implement remote
deployment of devices.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring NAP-based remote deployment, complete the following tasks:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2
l Connecting the device having an empty configuration to a device in the current network
via a single hop by using network cables
l Ensuring that the interfaces connecting the device with an empty configuration and the
device in the current network are both in the Up state, and support NAP.
Data Preparation
NOTE
l If the IP addresses used for establishing NAP connections are to be manually configured, you need to
prepare the following data before configuring NAP.
l Conversely, if the IP addresses for establishing NAP connections are to be automatically configured,
you can skip this.
To configure NAP-based remote deployment, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Two primary IP addresses. The two IP addresses are primary IP addresses for the
master interface and the slave interface respectively, and should be on the same
network segment.
2 Two secondary IP addresses. The two IP addresses are secondary IP addresses for
the master interface and the slave interface respectively, and should be on the same
network segment.

1.2.2 Configuring and Starting the NAP Master Interface
You can assign an IP address to the NAP master interface or use the IP address that is
automatically allocated by the system to start the NAP master interface.
Context
CAUTION
If commands affecting the IP address configuration or IP packet forwarding (such as
configurations and commands related to the VPN, Eth-Trunk, or Layer 2 interface) exist on
device of the master interface, NAP enabled on the master interface becomes unavailable. You
are recommended to delete these commands and re-enable NAP.
Do as follows on the switch to configure and start the NAP master interface.
In NAP, IP addresses can be allocated either automatically or manually.
Procedure
l Automatic allocation of IP addresses
1. Run:
system-view
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
nap port master
The NAP Master interface is configured and started.
l Manual IP address allocation
Two methods are available for manually allocating IP addresses. You can choose the
method according to actual needs.
You can specify the NAP IP address pool. Then, IP addresses are automatically allocated
to the IP address pool. To use this method, do as follows.
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
nap ip-pool ip-address mask-length
An IP address pool is configured for NAP.
The default IP address pool for establishing NAP connections is 10.167.253.0/24. You
can run the nap ip-pool ip-address mask-length command to change the IP address
pool.
NOTE
After NAP is started on the master device, the IP address pool cannot be changed.
3. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
4. Run:
nap port master
The NAP Master interface is configured and started.
You can also specify the NAP IP addresses. To use this method, do as follows.
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
nap port master
The NAP master interface is configured and started.
4. Run:
nap local-ip mast-inter-mast-ip sub-ip mast-inter-sub-ip peer-ip sub-
inter-mast-ip sub-ip sub-inter-sub-ip mask-length
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4
IP addresses are configured for establishing NAP connections.
The default IP address pool for establishing NAP connections is 10.167.253.0/24.
When configuring IP addresses, ensure that the primary IP addresses of both the master
and the slave interfaces are on the same network segment, and that the secondary IP
addresses of both the master and the slave interfaces are on the same network segment.
----End
1.2.3 Remote Login
After the neighbor relationship is set up, you can log in to the NAP slave device from the NAP
master device.
Context
Using the display nap interface command, you can view the NAP status of an interface to
ensure that the interface is assigned a correct IP address.
Do as follows on the switch where the NAP master interface is configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
nap login neighbor
The login to the slave device from the master device is performed.
l If the slave device has an empty configuration, you can log in to the slave device from the
master device without a user name and a password.
l If, however, the slave device is configured with user name(s) and password(s), you must
enter the correct user name and password to perform a NAP-based remote login to the slave
device.
NOTE
To ensure security for NAP, the slave device having an empty configuration checks the source address of
the Telnet login. If the Telnet source address is the NAP address of the master device that is telnetting to
the slave device, the slave device allows the master device to directly log in without being authenticated.
This is because by default, the user level of the remote login based on the NAP address is the same as the
login through the console interface, which enjoys the highest user level. If the Telnet source address is not
the NAP address of the master device, the remote login fails.
If ip source check user-bind enable command is executed on an interface, the interface cannot connect
to the NAP neighbor.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5
1.2.4 Disabling NAP on the Slave Device
If the NAP function is no longer required, you need to disable NAP on the slave interface of the
slave device.
Context
The master device has logged in to the slave device through Telnet. The NAP function is no
longer required, and to ensure security of the network, NAP should be globally disabled on the
slave interface of the slave device.
Do as follows on the switch that is configured as the NAP slave device.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
undo nap slave enable
NAP is disabled on the slave device.
----End
1.2.5 Checking the Configuration
After configuring NAP-based remote deployment, you can view the NAP status globally or on
a specified interface.
Prerequisite
NAP-based remote deployment has been completed.
Procedure
Step 1 Using the display nap status command, you can view the current NAP status.
Step 2 Using the display nap interface [ interface-type interface-number ] command, you can view
the NAP status of the specified interface.
----End
Example
Run the display nap status command to view the current NAP status.
<Quidway> display nap status
Slave port status : Enable
Nap ip-pool/Mask : 12.12.12.0/24
Run the display nap interface interface-type interface-number command to view the NAP status
of the specified interface.
<Quidway> display nap interface gigabitethernet1/0/1
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6
l If the interface is not assigned an IP address, the following information is displayed.
------------------------------------------------------
NAP master port list:
Port count : 2
------------------------------------------------------
Port property : Master
Current status : DETECTING
Local port : GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Peer port : GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Local primary ip : NULL
Peer primary ip : NULL
Local secondary ip : NULL
Peer secondary ip : NULL
Hello time : 3s
Linked time : 00:00:00
------------------------------------------------------
Port property : Master
Current status : DETECTING
Local port : GigabitEthernet1/0/2
Peer port : GigabitEthernet1/0/2
Local primary ip : NULL
Peer primary ip : NULL
Local secondary ip : NULL
Peer secondary ip : NULL
Hello time : 3s
Linked time : 00:00:00
------------------------------------------------------
l If the interface is assigned an IP address, the following information is displayed.
------------------------------------------------------
NAP master port list :
Port count : 2
------------------------------------------------------
Port property : Master
Current status : IP-ASSIGNED
Local port : GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Peer port : GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Local primary ip : 12.12.12.5
Peer primary ip : 12.12.12.6
Local secondary ip : 12.12.12.9
Peer secondary ip : 12.12.12.10
Hello time : 3s
Linked time : 00:09:12
------------------------------------------------------
Port property : Master
Current status : IP-ASSIGNED
Local port : GigabitEthernet1/0/2
Peer port : GigabitEthernet1/0/2
Local primary ip : 10.10.10.5
Peer primary ip : 10.10.10.6
Local secondary ip : 10.10.10.9
Peer secondary ip : 10.10.10.10
Hello time : 3s
Linked time : 00:03:41
------------------------------------------------------
1.3 Configuration Examples
This section provides upgrade and maintenance examples together with the configuration
flowchart. The configuration examples explain networking requirements, configuration notes,
and configuration roadmap.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7
1.3.1 Example for Configuring NAP-based Remote Deployment in
Static Mode
In this example, the temporary neighbor relationship is set up between the switch and the device
with the empty configuration and IP addresses are assigned to the switch and the device to
implement remote deployment in manual mode.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 1-1, the user needs to perform a remote login to Switch B from Switch A.
Switch B is the master device, and temporary neighbor relationship is to be set up between
Switch B and Switch C having an empty configuration. Switch B and Switch C need to be directly
connected via a single hop. Both the interfaces connecting Switch B and Switch C should be in
the Up state, and should support NAP.
Figure 1-1 Networking diagram of NAP-based remote deployment
Network
SwitchA PC SwitchB SwitchC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure a NAP master interface on Switch B.
2. Configure an IP address for establishing a NAP connection on Switch B.
3. Use NAP to log in to Switch C from Switch B by means of Telnet.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Two primary IP addresses. The two IP addresses are primary IP addresses for the master
interface and the slave interface respectively, and should be on the same network segment.
l Two secondary IP addresses. The two IP addresses are secondary IP addresses for the
master interface and the slave interface respectively, and should be on the same network
segment.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure a NAP master interface on Switch B
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchB
[SwitchB] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] nap port master
Step 2 Configure an IP address for establishing a NAP connection on Switch B
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] nap local-ip 12.12.12.5 sub-ip 12.12.12.9 peer-ip
12.12.12.6 sub-ip 12.12.12.10 30
Are you sure to continue?[Y/N] y
# After the preceding configuration is complete, run the display nap status command on
Switch B. You can view that NAP has been enabled on Switch B. Then, run the display nap
interface command. You can view that the primary and secondary IP addresses have been
assigned to the master and slave interfaces. For example:
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] display nap status
Slave port status : Enable
Nap ip-pool/Mask : 10.167.253.0/24
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] display nap interface
------------------------------------------------------
NAP master port list
Port count : 1
------------------------------------------------------
Port property : Master
Current status : IP-ASSIGNED
Local port : GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Peer port : GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Local primary ip : 12.12.12.5
Peer primary ip : 12.12.12.6
Local secondary ip : 12.12.12.9
Peer secondary ip : 12.12.12.10
Hello time : 3s
Linked time : 00:02:33
------------------------------------------------------
Step 3 Log in to the slave device from the master device.
# Configure Switch B.
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] nap login neighbor
Trying 12.12.12.10 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 12.12.12.10 ...
Info: The max number of VTY users is 10, and the number
of current VTY users on line is 1.
Step 4 Disable NAP on the slave device.
# Configure Switch C.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchC
[SwitchC] undo nap slave enable
----End
Configuration Files
None
1.3.2 Example for Configuring NAP-based Remote Deployment in
Automatic Mode
In this example, the temporary neighbor relationship is set up between a switch and another
switch that has the empty configuration to implement remote deployment in automatic mode.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 1-2, the user needs to perform a remote login to Switch B from Switch A.
Switch B is the master device, and temporary neighbor relationship is to be set up between
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9
Switch B and Switch C having an empty configuration. Switch B and Switch C need to be directly
connected via a single hop. Both the interfaces connecting Switch B and Switch C should be in
the Up state, and should support NAP.
Figure 1-2 Networking diagram of NAP-based remote deployment
Network
SwitchA PC SwitchB SwitchC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure a primary IP address and a secondary IP address on Switch B.
2. Configure a NAP master interface on Switch B.
3. Telnet to Switch C from Switch B by means of NAP.
Data Preparation
None
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the NAP master interface
# Do as follows on Switch B.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchB
[SwitchB] interface gigabitethernet1/0/1
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] nap port master
Step 2 Logging in to the slave device from the master device.
# Do as follows on Switch B.
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] nap login neighbor
Trying 10.167.253.10 ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.167.253.10 ...
Info: The max number of VTY users is 10, and the number
of current VTY users on line is 1.
Step 3 Shutting down NAP on the slave device.
# Do as follows on Switch C.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchC
[SwitchC] undo nap slave enable
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
10
Configuration Files
None
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 1 NAP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
11
2 CSS Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to configure the cluster switch system (CSS) function on the
S9300.
2.1 CSS Overview
A CSS is also called a stack. In a CSS, two switches are connected through dedicated stacking
cables to form a logical switch.
2.2 CSS Features Supported by the S9300
This section describes the CSS features supported by the S9300.
2.3 Configuring the CCS Function
This section describes how to configure the CSS function on the S9300.
2.4 Configuration Examples
This section provides a CSS configuration example.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
12
2.1 CSS Overview
A CSS is also called a stack. In a CSS, two switches are connected through dedicated stacking
cables to form a logical switch.
A single switch cannot meet requirements of the increasing access volume of a data center and
network reliability. To meet the forwarding requirement of the data center and improve network
reliability, the CSS technology is used.
After two switches set up a CSS, one switch functions as the master switch, and the other
functions as the backup switch.
2.2 CSS Features Supported by the S9300
This section describes the CSS features supported by the S9300.
NOTE
CSS cannot be configured on the Web NMS.
Prerequisites for Setting Up a CSS
A CSS can be set up when the following conditions are met:
l The switches support the CSS feature. (Currently, the S9306 and the S9312 support the
CSS feature.) An S9306 and an S9312 can form a CSS.
l The CSS contains only two switches.
l Both the switches are configured with stacking cards.
l The same type of SRUs (SRUA or SRUB) must be used on each switch.
NOTE
The LE02SRUA VER.A and LE02SRUB VER.A do not support the CSS function.
l The two switches are connected through stacking cables.
l The two switches run normally.
l The CSS function is enabled on the two switches.
l The two switches use the same software version. If the master switch detects a different
software version on the backup switch, the software of the backup switch is upgraded or
rolled back to the version of the master switch.
Connection of Stacking Cables
Each SRU can be installed with a stacking card and each stacking card provides four interfaces.
When the two S9300s are installed with double SRUs, the eight pairs of interfaces on the stacking
cards are connected through stacking cables, as shown in Figure 2-1. Connect the stacking
interfaces strictly according to Figure 2-1 and do not change the connections. Every interface
must be connected to a stacking cable.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
13
Figure 2-1 Connection of stacking cables
SRU 1 3 2 4
1 3 2 4 SRU
SRU 1 3 2 4
1 3 2 4 SRU
SwitchB SwitchA
Stacking cable
Stacking Card

How a CSS Is Set up
A CSS is set up automatically after two switches are connected through stacking cables and
enabled with the CSS function. After competition, one switch becomes the master switch, and
the other becomes the backup switch.
The master switch is elected as follows:
l The switch that starts and enters the stacking state (with the CSS function enabled) first is
selected as the master switch.
l If the two switches start at the same time, the switch of the higher priority becomes the
master switch.
l If the two switches start at the same time and have the same stacking priority, the one with
a smaller MAC address becomes the master switch.
All the boards in the CSS are registered with the active SRU of the CSS. After the registration,
the configuration data is restored through the configuration file on the active SRU of the CSS.
The configuration restoration process of the CSS is the same as that of a single switch.
Before the CSS is set up, each switch is an independent entity and has its own IP address. You
need to manage the switches separately. After the CSS is set up, the switches in the CSS form
a logical entity, and you can use a single IP address to manage and maintain the switches
uniformly. The IP address and MAC address of the CSS is the IP address and MAC address of
the master switch when the CSS is set up.
Active/Standby Switchover
If SwitchA is the master switch, and SwitchB is the backup switch, then the active SRU of
SwitchA becomes the active SRU of the CSS, and the active SRU of SwitchB becomes the
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
14
standby SRU of the CSS. HA is implemented between the active and standby SRUs of the CSS.
The standby SRUs of SwitchA and SwitchB function as the candidate standby SRUs of the CSS.
If active/standby switchover is performed on SwitchA or SwitchB, the standby SRU of the switch
becomes the standby SRU of the CSS.
l When active/standby switchover occurs on the master switch (SwitchA):
SwitchB becomes the master switch, and the original standby SRU of the CSS becomes
the active SRU of the CSS.
SwitchA becomes the backup switch.
The active SRU of SwitchA restarts. The standby SRU of SwitchA becomes the standby
SRU of the CSS and synchronizes data from the new active SRU of the CSS.
l When active/standby switchover occurs on the backup switch (SwitchB):
The master switch and backup switch remain unchanged.
The active SRU of SwitchB (namely the original standby SRU of the CSS) restarts. The
standby SRU of SwitchB becomes the standby SRU of the CSS and synchronizes data
from the active SRU of the CSS.
Management and Traffic Forwarding in a CSS
After a CSS is set up, you can log in to the CSS through service interfaces on LPUs and the
serial port or console port on the active SRU to configure services and manage the CSS.
In a CSS, the interface view is identified by the frame ID, slot ID, subcard ID, and interface
number. You can specify any interface on the two switches to configure services on the interface.
You can also choose to specify only the frame ID and slot ID to manage the specified LPU, for
example, query information about the LPU or reset the LPU.
Different from the service traffic forwarded on a single switch, the service traffic forwarded
between the two switches of the CSS needs to pass through the switching fabric twice. Similar
to the single switch, the CSS also processes the packet content in both inbound direction and
outbound direction.
CSS Breaking
l Cause of CSS breaking
After a CSS is set up, the active and standby SRUs of the CSS send heartbeat messages to
each other to maintain the CSS status. If a stacking cable, a stacking card, or an SRU is
faulty, communication between the two switches may fail because no stacking link is
available. In this case, the heartbeat between the two switches times out and the CSS breaks
into two independent switches.
l Impact of CSS breaking
If the two switches run normally after the CSS breaks, they use the same IP address and
same MAC address to communicate with other devices on the network because their global
configurations are exactly the same. This causes faults on the entire network and conflict
of IP addresses and MAC addresses. In this case, the system displays a message, asking
you to change the IP address and MAC address of a switch or remove a switch from the
network.
NOTE
When the CSS breaks, the alarm message may be displayed only on the serial port of a switch and cannot
be sent to the NMS because of conflict of IP addresses and MAC addresses.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
15
Backing Up and Restoring Configuration Files
When a device enters the CSS state, it automatically backs up the previous configuration file.
In this way, the device can restore the previous configuration after the CSS function is disabled.
After you enable the CSS function and restart the device immediately, the system generates a
backup configuration file and names it by adding the extension .bak to the previous configuration
file name.
l If the original extension of the configuration file is .cfg, the extension of the backup
configuration file is .cfg.bak.
l If the original extension of the configuration file is .zip, the extension of the backup
configuration file is .zip.bak.
Device status Configuration Files
Non-CSS Current configuration file: s9300.cfg
CSS Current configuration file: s9300.cfg
Backup configuration file: s9300.cfg.bak

If you want to restore the previous configuration after disabling the CSS function, do as follows:
1. Run the rename source-filename destination-filename command to change the name of
the backup configuration file or run the copy source-filename destination-filename [ all ]
command to copy the backup configuration file and name the copied file.
2. Run the startup saved-configuration configuration-file command to specify the renamed
configuration file as the next startup configuration file.
3. Run the undo css enable [ all | frame frame-id ] command to disable the CSS function and
restart the device immediately.
NOTE
Automatic configuration file backup prevents configuration loss caused by misoperation. It is
recommended that you save the configuration manually when upgrading the system software and adjusting
the network.
Features Supported in a CSS
All features of the S9300 except the following are supported in a CSS:
l Ethernet clock synchronization
l PTP
l PoE
2.3 Configuring the CCS Function
This section describes how to configure the CSS function on the S9300.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
16
2.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring the CSS function, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
As shown in Figure 2-2, SwitchA and SwitchB form a CSS. SwitchC is a user-side device and
is connected to the CSS through Eth-Trunk 1. The CSS is connected to an OSPF network through
Eth-Trunk 2.
By using the trunk technology, you can configure physical Ethernet ports on different switches
as an aggregated port. In this way, if a switch is faulty, the aggregated link still works, and
another switch manages and maintains the other aggregated ports. The device capacity is
improved and the backup between switches is implemented.
Figure 2-2 Networking of CSS application
SwitchA SwitchB
SwitchC
PC
OSPF
Eth-Trunk1
Eth-Trunk2
Stacking cable
Common cable

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the CSS function, complete the following tasks:
l Installing SRUs of the same type (SRUA or SRUB) on each switch
NOTE
The LE02SRUA VER.A and LE02SRUB VER.A do not support the CSS function.
l Installing a stacking card on each SRU
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
17
l Connecting the two switches through stacking cables
l Ensuring that the two switches run normally
l Ensuring that the two switches use the same software version (If the master switch detects
a different software version on the backup switch, the software of the backup switch is
upgraded or rolled back to the version of the master switch.)
Data Preparation
To configure the CSS function, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Frame IDs of member switches
Priorities of member switches

2.3.2 Configuring Frame ID or Priority of the S9300
When two switches with different frame IDs set up a CSS, the master switch is elected based
on the running status and priorities of the two switches. Two switches with the same frame ID
cannot set up a CSS.
Context
The switch with a higher priority is more likely to be elected as the master switch.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
set css { id new-id | priority priority } [ frame frame-id ]
The frame ID or priority of the S9300 is configured.
By default, the frame ID of the S9300 in a CSS is 1 and its priority is 1.
The frame IDs of the two switches in a CSS must be 1 and 2; otherwise, the CSS cannot be set
up.
NOTE
The configuration takes effect after the device is restarted.
----End
2.3.3 (Optional) Specifying the Master Switch
Generally, the master switch of a CSS is elected when the CSS is set up. If you want an
S9300 to function as the master switch, perform the following operation.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
18
Context
If the specified switch is already the master switch, status of the CSS remains unchanged.
If the specified switch is the backup switch, this switch becomes the master switch after data
backup is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
css master force [ frame frame-id ]
The S9300 is specified as the master switch.
NOTE
The configuration takes effect after the device is restarted.
In a CSS, if you do not specify frame frame-id in the command, the command takes effect only on the
master switch.
If the CSS function is disabled, this command takes effect only on the local device.
----End
2.3.4 Enabling the CSS Function
Before configuring the CSS function, you must enable the CSS function.
Context
The constraints on the CSS function are as follows:
l Currently, the S9306 and S9312 support the CSS feature.
l The CSS contains only two switches.
l Each switch must be configured with two SRUs and each SRU must be installed with a
stacking card.
l The SRUs on a switch must be of the same type.
NOTE
The LE02SRUA VER.A and LE02SRUB VER.A do not support the CSS function.
l The two switches are connected through stacking cables.
l The two switches must run normally.
l The two switches must use the same software version. If the master switch detects a different
software version on the backup switch, the software of the backup switch is upgraded or
rolled back to the version of the master switch.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
19
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
css enable
The CSS function is enabled.
NOTE
The configuration takes effect after the device is restarted.
By default, the CSS function is disabled on a device.
----End
2.3.5 Checking the Configuration
After a CSS is set up, you can view the frame ID, priority, and CSS status of each member
switch, and whether the CSS function is enabled.
Prerequisite
CSS configurations of the S9300 are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display css status [ save ] [ all | frame frame-id ] command to check the CSS
information.
----End
Example
<Quidway> display css status
Property Item Property Value
Frame ID 1
Priority 255
Enable switch On
CSS master force Off
CSS status master
2.4 Configuration Examples
This section provides a CSS configuration example.
2.4.1 Example for Configuring a CSS
You can configure the CSS function to improve the capacity and reliability of devices.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 2-3, SwitchA and SwitchB form a CSS. SwitchC is a user-side device and
is connected to the CSS through Eth-Trunk 1. The CSS is connected to an OSPF network through
Eth-Trunk 2. The CSS improves the capacity and reliability of switches.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
20
Figure 2-3 Networking of CSS application
SwitchA SwitchB
SwitchC
PC
OSPF
Eth-Trunk1
Eth-Trunk2
Stacking cable
Common cable

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure the frame IDs and priorities of SwitchA and SwitchB.
2. Enable the CSS function on SwitchA and SwitchB.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Frame IDs of member switches
l Priorities of member switches
Procedure
Step 1 Set the priority of SwitchA to 255 and enable the CSS function on SwitchA.
# Set the priority of the local frame to 255.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchA
[SwitchA] set css priority 255
Info: CSS config has been changed, need reboot to take effect.
# Enable the CSS function.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
21
[SwitchA] css enable
Reboot needed to change CSS config. Are you sure this operation and reboot now?
[Y/N]y
Step 2 Set the frame ID of SwitchB to 2 and enable the CSS function on SwitchB.
# Set the frame ID to 2.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchB
[SwitchB] set css id 2
Info: CSS config has been changed, need reboot to take effect.
# Enable the CSS function.
[SwitchB] css enable
Reboot needed to change CSS config. Are you sure this operation and reboot now?
[Y/N]y
Step 3 Verify the configuration.
# Check the CSS status of the switch with frame ID 1.
<SwitchA> dis css status frame 1
Property Item Property Value
Frame ID 1
Priority 255
Enable switch On
CSS master force Off
CSS status master
# Check the CSS status of the switch with frame ID 2.
<SwitchA> dis css status frame 2
Property Item Property Value
Frame ID 2
Priority 1
Enable switch On
CSS master force Off
CSS status backup
----End
Configuration Files
None.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 2 CSS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
22
3 Displaying the Device Status
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the functions and applications of the display commands and how to use
the display commands to view the running status of the device.
3.1 Display Commands
This section describes the functions of display commands and lists the display commands in
common use.
3.2 Displaying the Status of the S9300
This section describes how to use display commands to view the version, CPU, memory, and
voltage of a device.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
23
3.1 Display Commands
This section describes the functions of display commands and lists the display commands in
common use.
As an important means to maintain and troubleshoot a network, the display commands can be
used to collect current information about the version, device, and diagnosis of the S9300.
Table 3-1 lists the display commands in common use. For details, see the Quidway S9300
Terabit Routing Switch - Command Reference.
CAUTION
You are disallowed to run the display diagnostic-information command simultaneously on
multiple terminals connected to the S9300. Otherwise, the CPU usage of the S9300 may
obviously rise and the network performance may be degraded.
Table 3-1 Common display commands
Command Description
display current-configuration Displays the parameters that take effect currently on the
S9300.
display device Displays information about the S9300.
display version Displays the version and boards information of the
S9300.
display this Displays valid configurations in the current view.
display diagnostic-information It is mainly used to collect information about the S9300
when a fault cannot be located or rectified. Then, you can
send the information to Huawei technical personnel for
fault analysis.
NOTE
This command is not recommended for routine troubleshooting.
display this interface Displays the current status of the interface.

3.2 Displaying the Status of the S9300
This section describes how to use display commands to view the version, CPU, memory, and
voltage of a device.
3.2.1 Displaying Information About the S9300
You can use the display command to view information about S9300 components.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
24
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display device [ subrack-id/slot-id ]
The component type, online status, power status, register status, alarm status, and master/backup
status are displayed.
You can use the command in any view. The information displayed includes the slot number,
component type, online status, power status, register status, alarm status, and master/backup
status.
----End
3.2.2 Displaying the Version
You can run the command to view information about the software version, chassis type, main
control board version, and LPU version of the S9300.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display version [ slot slot-id | subrack-id/silkname ]
Version information is displayed.
You can run the display version command in any view to view the version of the S9300. You
can specify subrack-id/silkname to view the version of the board in a specified slot.
This command output includes information about the software version, chassis type, main
control board version, and LPU version.
----End
3.2.3 Displaying the Power Status of the S9300
You can use display commands to view information about the power status and power of the
S9300.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose power status is to be viewed.
Procedure
l Run:
display power
The power status is displayed.
l Run:
display power system
Information about the power is displayed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
25
You can use the command in any view to view the power status of the S9300. The
information displayed includes the power status, power used by the system (W), and power
used by boards (W).
CAUTION
Before expanding the system capacity, check whether the power supplies of the S9300 can
provide sufficient power after the expansion.
----End
3.2.4 Displaying the Board Voltage
You can use the display command to view the board voltage status, including the current voltage,
the upper threshold of the voltage, and the lower threshold of the voltage.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose board voltage is to be viewed.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display voltage { all | slot slot-id }
The board voltage is displayed.
You can use the command in any view to view the board voltage of the S9300.
----End
Example
<Quidway> display voltage slot 4
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Card SDR No. SensorName Status Upper Lower Voltage.(V)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 - 2 3.3V normal 3.9576 2.6316 3.4680
- 3 2.5V normal 3.0396 2.0808 2.6316
- 4 12V normal 14.4420 9.5700 12.7890
- 5 1.8V normal 2.1624 1.4382 1.8768
- 6 1.1V normal 1.3158 0.8772 1.1424
3.2.5 Displaying the Temperature
You can use the display command to view the board temperature, including the current
temperature, the upper threshold of the temperature, and the lower threshold of the temperature.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose temperature is to be viewed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
26
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display temperature { all | slot slot-id }
The board temperature is displayed.
You can use this command in any view to view the working temperature of boards.
----End
Example
<Quidway> display temperature all
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Card SDR No. SensorName Status Upper Lower Temperature.(C)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9 - 1 G24CA TEM normal 88.00 0.00 27.00
13 - 1 SRUA TEMP normal 82.00 0.00 39.00
- 2 SRUA TEMP normal 82.00 0.00 30.00
3.2.6 Displaying the Fan Status
You can use the display command to view the fan status, including the fan running status, fan
registration status, fan rotation speed, and fan mode.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose fan status is to be viewed.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display fan
The fan status is displayed.
You can use the command in any view to view the fan status of the S9300.
----End
3.2.7 Displaying the CPU Usage
When the CPU usage is high, you can run the display cpu-usage command to check the CPU
usage and disable unnecessary functions whose CPU usage is high.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose CPU usage is to be viewed.
Procedure
l Run:
display cpu-usage [ slave | slot slot-id ]
Statistics of the CPU usage are displayed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
27
l Run:
display cpu-usage configuration [ slave | slot slot-id ]
Configurations of the CPU usage are displayed.
You can use the display cpu-usage command in any view to view statistics and
configurations of the CPU usage of the S9300.
If slave is specified, the CPU usage of the slave main control board is displayed. If no
slave main control board is installed on the S9300, the system prompts error information.
If slot slot-id is specified, the CPU usage of the LPU in this slot is displayed.
If neither slave nor slot slot-id is specified, the CPU usage of the active main control
board is displayed.
----End
Example
<Quidway> display cpu-usage configuration
The CPU usage monitor is turned on.
The current monitor cycle is 10 seconds.
The current monitor warning threshold is 80%.
The current monitor restore threshold is 75%.
<Quidway> display cpu-usage slot 3
CPU Usage Stat. Cycle: 10 (Second)
CPU Usage : 63% Max: 99%
CPU Usage Stat. Time : 2009-06-18 23:10:46 DST
CPU utilization for five seconds: 63%: one minute: 63%: five minutes: 62%.
TaskName CPU Runtime(CPU Tick High/Tick Low) Task Explanation
BOX 0% 0/ a39a6 BOX Output
_TIL 0% 0/ 0 Infinite loop event task
_EXC 0% 0/ 0 Exception Agent Task
VIDL 37% 0/42968927 DOPRA IDLE
TICK 0% 0/ 4b3058
SIMC 0% 0/ 0 SIMC
LHAL 0% 0/ 130be LHAL
DEV 0% 0/ 0 DEV Device
FCAT 0% 0/ c9c9 FCAT FECD task for catch packet
FOAM 0% 0/ 0 FOAM
BEAT 0% 0/ 101597 BEAT
ECM 0% 0/ 685a3 ECM
IPCR 0% 0/ 35722 IPCR
VPR 0% 0/ 0 VPR
VPS 0% 0/ 0 VPS
IPCQ 0% 0/ 373dfa IPCQIPC task for single queue
VP 0% 0/ 0 VP Virtual path task
RPCQ 0% 0/ 62bec RPCQRemote procedure call
RTMR 0% 0/ 18aecb RTMR
VMON 0% 0/ 4656 VMONSystem monitor
FBUF 0% 0/ 0 FBUF
STND 0% 0/ 0 STNDStandby task
INFO 0% 0/ 247e INFOInformation center
DEVA 0% 0/ 0 DEVA Device assistant
SUPP 0% 0/ 0 SUPP
SIMU 0% 0/ 0 SIMU
ELAB 0% 0/ 4dd08 ELAB
RMON 0% 0/ 1e086 RMON
FM93 0% 0/ 0 FM9300
FMCK 0% 0/ 93baef FMCK9300
LSPA 0% 0/ 0 LSPA
SNPG 0% 0/ 18460 SNPG Multicast Snooping
L3AD 0% 0/ 0 L3AD
NDAD 0% 0/ 0 NDAD
FIB6 0% 0/ 0 FIB6IPv6 FIB
SOCK 0% 0/ 0 SOCKPacket schedule and process
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
28
FIB 0% 0/ 0 FIB Forward Information Base
FMAT 0% 0/ 38c7 FMATFault Manage task
FECD 0% 0/ 9c53 FECD Forward Equal Class Develope
NSA 0% 0/ 124bd NSA
ARPA 0% 0/ 0 ARPA
PPIU 0% 0/ 0 PPIU
PING 0% 0/ 0 PING
MPLS 0% 0/ 0 MPLS
GREP 0% 0/ 0 GREP
ACL 0% 0/ 0 ACL
QOSB 0% 0/ 0 QOSB
DEFD 0% 0/ 0 DEFD
SECB 0% 0/ 0 SECB
STRB 0% 0/ 0 STRB
SAM 0% 0/ 1dfac SAM Service Agent Module
MSYN 2% 0/ 3d8745a MSYN Mac Synchronization
RACL 0% 0/ 0 RACL
IFPD 1% 0/ 36a65f3 IFPD
PPI 0% 0/ 658294 PPI Product Process Interface
SMAG 0% 0/ 0 SMAG Smart Link Agent
ADPT 0% 0/ 0 ADPT
RRPP 0% 0/ 0 RRPP Proxy
L2MC 0% 0/ 0 L2MC L2 Multicast
SDKE 0% 0/ 0 SDKE
IS2U 0% 0/ 0 IS2U
SFPM 0% 0/ 0 SFPM
root 0% 0/ 0 tS04
bcmDPC 0% 0/ 0 tS0c
PortMon.0 0% 0/ 39a55 tS0d
bcmL2MOD.0 49% 0/57c81159 tS0e
bcmCNTR.0 4% 0/ 867a6a1 tS0f
bcmTX 0% 0/ 125642 tS10
bcmXGS3AsyncTX 0% 0/ 0 tS11
bmLINK.0 3% 0/ 64d36a0 tS12
bcmRX 0% 0/ 8c2ee7 tS17
bcmD 0% 0/ 0 bcmD
VT 0% 0/ 14f98 VT
LOAD 0% 0/ 0 LOAD
OS 4% 0/ 7270e00 Operation System
3.2.8 Displaying the Memory Usage
You can use the display command to view the memory usage statistics and threshold.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose memory usage is to be viewed.
Procedure
l Run:
display memory-usage [ slave | slot slot-id ]
The memory usage is displayed.
You can run the command in any view to view statistics of the memory usage.
If slave is specified, the memory usage of the standby main control board is displayed.
If no slave main control board is installed on the S9300, the system prompts error
information.
If slot slot-id is specified, the memory usage of the LPU in this slot is displayed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
29
If neither slave nor slot slot-id is specified, the memory usage of the active main control
board is displayed.
l Run:
display memory-usage threshold [ slot slot-id ]
The threshold of the memory usage is displayed.
You can run the command in any view to view the threshold of the memory usage. If slot
slot-id is specified, the threshold of the memory usage of a specified LPU is displayed.
Otherwise, the threshold of the memory usage of the main control board is displayed.
----End
Example
<Quidway> display memory-usage
Memory utilization statistics at 2008-12-15 15:17:42 746 ms
System Total Memory Is: 394152720 bytes
Total Memory Used Is: 130975664 bytes
Memory Using Percentage Is: 33%
<Quidway> display memory-usage slot 9
Slot 9/0 Memory utilization Info:
Memory utilization statistics at 2008-12-15 15:08:58 532 ms
System Total Memory Is: 59656976 bytes
Total Memory Used Is: 16651852 bytes
Memory Using Percentage Is: 27%
<Quidway> display memory-usage threshold
Current memory threshold of the main board is 90%.
3.2.9 Displaying the Environment Version
You can use the display command to view the versions of the System Management Software
(SMS) and the Controller Area Network bus (CANbus).
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose environment version is to be viewed.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display environment version
The version of System Management Software (SMS) and the version of the on-board Controller
Area Network bus (CANbus) are displayed.
You can use the command in any view to view the environment version of the S9300.
----End
3.2.10 Displaying the Interface Status
You can use the display command to view the running status, basic configuration, and packet
forwarding on an interface.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose interface status is to be viewed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
30
Procedure
l Run:
display interface interface-type interface-number
The status of the specified interface is displayed.
You can use the command in any view to view the interface status of the S9300. Information
about the status of an interface contains the running status, basic configurations, and
statistics on transmitting and receiving of packets on an interface.
l Display the current status of an interface.
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
display this interface
The current status of the interface is displayed.
This command is equivalent to the display interface command.
----End
Example
<Quidway> display interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
GigabitEthernet1/0/0 current state : DOWN
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Description:HUAWEI, Quidway Series, GigabitEthernet1/0/0 Interface
Switch Port,PVID : 1,The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 0022-0033-0044
QoS max-bandwidth : 1000000 Kbps
Output queue : (Urgent queue : Size/Length/Discards) 0/50/0
Output queue : (Protocol queue : Size/Length/Discards) 0/1000/0
Output queue : (FIFO queue : Size/Length/Discards) 0/256/0
Last physical up time : -
Last physical down time : 2008-02-15 19:50:32 UTC-05:00
Port Mode: FORCE FIBER
Speed : 1000, Loopback: NONE
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: ENABLE
Mdi : NORMAL
Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 0 bits/sec,Record time: -
Output peak rate 0 bits/sec,Record time: -
Input: 0 packets, 0 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Throttles: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0
Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0, Frames: 0
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
31
Output: 0 packets, 0 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0
Input bandwidth utilization threshold : 100.00%
Output bandwidth utilization threshold: 100.00%
Input bandwidth utilization : 0.00%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0.00%

<Quidway> display interface vlanif 3
Vlanif3 current state : DOWN
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Description:HUAWEI, Quidway Series, Vlanif3 Interface
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet Address is 1.1.1.1/24
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 0022-0033-0044
Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input: 0 packets, 0 bytes
Output: 0 packets, 0 bytes
Input bandwidth utilization : --
Output bandwidth utilization : --
[Quidway-Vlanif3] display this interface
Vlanif3 current state : DOWN
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Description:HUAWEI, Quidway Series, Vlanif3 Interface
Route Port,The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Internet Address is 1.1.1.1/24
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 0022-0033-0044
Last 300 seconds input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input: 0 packets, 0 bytes
Output: 0 packets, 0 bytes
Input bandwidth utilization : --
Output bandwidth utilization : --
3.2.11 Displaying Electronic Labels
You can use the display command to view information about electronic labels, including the
board type, BOM code, description, manufacture date, vendor name, issuing number, Common
Language Equipment Identification (CLEI) code, and sales BOM code.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose electronic labels are to be viewed.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display elabel [ backplane | [ slot-id ] [ brief ] ]
Electronic labels are displayed.
You can run the command in any view to view the electronic labels of the S9300. slot-id can be
specified to view label information about the board in a specified slot. The information displayed
includes the board type, bar code, item, description, manufacture date, vendor name, issuing
number, Common Language Equipment Identification (CLEI) code, and BOM code.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
32
brief indicates whether the electronic label of an optical module needs to be displayed. If
brief is specified, the electronic label of an optical module is not displayed.
----End
Example
<Quidway> display elabel 9 brief
It is executing, please wait...
[Slot_9]
/$[Board Integration Version]
/$BoardIntegrationVersion=3.0
[Main_Board]
/$[ArchivesInfo Version]
/$ArchivesInfoVersion=3.0
[Board Properties]
BoardType=LE02G48TA
BarCode=020LTYW0A1000496
Item=03020LTY
Description=Quidway S9300,LE02G48TA,48-Port 1000BASE-T Interface Card(EA,RJ45),3
2K MAC,1*1
Manufactured=2010-01-30
VendorName=Huawei
IssueNumber=00
CLEICode=58695
BOM=02358568
<Quidway> display elabel backplane
It is executing, please wait...
[BackPlane_1]
[Board Properties]
BoardType=LE02BAKJ
BarCode=020JQF109A000005
Item=03020JQF
Description=Quidway S9300,LE02BAKJ,S9306 POE Backplane,1*1
Manufactured=2009-10-28
VendorName=Huawei
IssueNumber=00
CLEICode=56324
BOM=02352868
3.2.12 Displaying Alarm Information
You can use the display command to view alarm information during the running of the S9300.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose alarm information is to be viewed.
Procedure
l Run:
display alarm { all | slot slot-id }
Alarm information during the running of the S9300 is displayed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
33
You can use the command in any view to view alarm information about the S9300. The
information displayed includes hot backup alarm, reboot alarm, hot swap alarm of the LPU,
or voltage alarm.
----End
Example
<Quidway> display alarm all
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Level Date Time Info
Warning 2008-12-11 10:12:19 The "1.2V" voltage sensor of LPU board[9
](entity) exceed lower minor limit.
Warning 2008-12-11 10:12:19 The "12V" voltage sensor of LPU board[9]
(entity) exceed lower minor limit.
Warning 2008-12-11 10:12:19 The "2.5V" voltage sensor of LPU board[9
](entity) exceed lower minor limit.
Warning 2008-12-11 10:12:19 The "1.8V" voltage sensor of LPU board[9
](entity) exceed lower minor limit.
Warning 2008-12-11 10:12:19 The "1.25V" voltage sensor of LPU board[
9](entity) exceed lower minor limit.
Warning 2008-12-11 10:12:19 The "1.05V" voltage sensor of LPU board[
9](entity) exceed lower minor limit.
Warning 2008-12-11 10:12:19 The "3.3V" voltage sensor of LPU board[9
](entity) exceed lower minor limit.
Warning 2008-12-11 10:12:15 The "1.0V" voltage sensor of SRU board[1
3](entity) exceed upper minor limit.
Warning 2008-12-11 10:12:15 The "CLK_DET_50M" sensor13 of SRU board[
13] detect clock signal fault.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.13 Displaying Diagnostic Information
You can use the display diagnostic-information command to collect the running information
of all modules for fault location instead of running all the related display commands.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose diagnostic information is to be viewed.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display diagnostic-information
Diagnostic information about the S9300 is displayed.
Diagnostic information includes: clocks, versions, current configuration files, saved
configuration files, physical and protocol information about an interface, statistics on
transmitting and receiving of packets, memory usage, and system logs.
NOTE
Diagnostic information is lengthy and variable with devices. Therefore, no example of diagnostic
information here is provided.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
34
3.2.14 Displaying the Health Status
You can use the display command to view the health status information, including the CF card
or flash usage, CPU usage, memory usage, power supply status, fan status, voltage, and
temperature.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose health status is to be viewed:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display health
The health status of the S9300 is displayed.
The health status involves the usage of the Compact Flash (CF) card or flash, CPU usage,
memory usage, power supply status, fan status, voltage, and temperature.
----End
Example
<Quidway> display health
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Card SDR No. SensorName Status Upper Lower Voltage.(V)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 - 2 3.3V normal 3.9592 2.6460 3.3320
- 3 1.05V normal 1.2642 0.8428 1.0584
- 4 1.25V normal 1.4994 0.9996 1.2838
- 5 1.8V normal 2.1560 1.4406 1.8130
- 6 2.5V normal 2.9988 1.9992 2.5088
- 7 12V normal 14.3590 9.5450 12.0350
- 8 1.2V normal 1.4406 0.9604 1.2250
3 - 3 3.3V normal 3.9592 2.6460 3.3712
- 4 2.5V normal 2.9988 1.9992 2.5088
- 5 1.8V normal 2.1560 1.4406 1.8620
- 6 1.5V normal 1.8032 1.1956 1.4896
- 7 1.2V normal 1.4406 0.9604 1.1760
- 8 1.05 normal 1.2642 0.8428 1.0976
- 9 1.2V normal 1.4406 0.9604 1.2544
- 10 12V normal 14.4600 9.6600 12.4800
4 - 2 3.3V normal 3.9592 2.6460 3.3320
- 3 2.5V normal 2.9988 1.9992 2.5284
- 4 12V normal 14.3590 9.5450 12.0350
- 5 1.8V normal 2.1560 1.4406 1.8032
- 6 1.1V normal 1.3230 0.8820 1.1074
5 - 2 3.3V normal 3.9592 2.6460 3.3516
- 3 2.5V normal 2.9988 1.9992 2.5088
- 4 12V normal 14.3590 9.5450 12.1180
- 5 1.8V normal 2.1560 1.4406 1.8130
- 6 1.1V normal 1.3230 0.8820 1.1074
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Card SDR No. SensorName Status Upper Lower Temperature.(C)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 - 1 G24CA_VA TEMP normal 88.00 0.00 28.00
3 - 1 G48SD_VA TEMP1 normal 88.00 0.00 31.00
- 2 G48SD_VA TEMP2 normal 78.00 0.00 26.00
4 - 1 01MCUA_VA TEMP normal 80.00 0.00 29.00
5 - 1 01MCUA_VA TEMP normal 80.00 0.00 30.00
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
PowerNo Present Mode State Current(A) Voltage(V) RealPwr(W)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
35
PWR1 YES DC Supply NotSupport NotSupport NotSupport
PWR2 NO N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
POE1 NO N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FanId FanNum Present Register Speed Mode
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FAN1 [1-0] NO NO 0%(0 ) AUTO
System Memory Usage Information:
System memory usage at 2008-02-16 04:21:34 290 ms
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Total Memory(MB) Used Memory(MB) Used Percentage Upper Limit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 185 41 22% 85%
3 185 45 24% 85%
4 371 170 45% 90%
5 371 171 46% 90%
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
System CPU Usage Information:
System cpu usage at 2008-02-16 04:21:34 290 ms
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot CPU Usage Upper Limit
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 7% 80%
3 67% 80%
4 5% 80%
5 4% 80%
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Disk Usage Information:
System disk usage at 2008-02-16 04:21:34 290 ms
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Device Total Memory(MB) Used Memory(MB) Used Percentage
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4 flash: 104 66 63%
cfcard: 1000 751 75%
5 flash: 104 26 25%
cfcard: 1000 465 46%
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.2.15 Displaying Information About a Transceiver on the Interface
You can use the display command to view information about the optical module of an interface,
including the specifications, manufacturer, and alarm information about the optical module.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose transceiver on the interface is viewed:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
display transceiver
Information about a transceiver on the interface is displayed.
Information about a transceiver on the interface involves general information, manufacturing
information, and alarm information about this transceiver. If the parameter verbose is specified,
diagnostic information is also displayed.
----End
Example
<Quidway>display transceiver interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0

Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
36
GigabitEthernet1/0/0 transceiver information:
-------------------------------------------------------------
Common information:
Transceiver Type :1000_BASE_T_SFP
Connector Type :Unknown or Unspecified
Wavelength(nm) :0
Transfer Distance(m) :
Digital Diagnostic Monitoring :NO
Vendor Name :FINISAR CORP.
Ordering Name :
-------------------------------------------------------------
Manufacture information:
Manu. Serial Number :P8Q004D
Manufacturing Date :2005-12-05
Vendor Name :FINISAR CORP.
-------------------------------------------------------------
Alarm information:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 3 Displaying the Device Status
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
37
4 Hardware Management
About This Chapter
This chapter describes hardware management on the S9300, including power on and power off
of boards, electronic label backup, board reset, and master/slave switchover of the main control
boards.
4.1 Introduction to Hardware Management
This section describes the hardware management of the S9300.
4.2 Hardware Management Supported by the S9300
This section describes the hardware management operations supported by the S9300.
4.3 Powering On and Off the Board
This section describes how to power on and off the board.
4.4 Backing Up Electronic Labels
This section describes how to back up electronic labels.
4.5 Setting the Rotating Speed of a Fan
This section describes how to set the rotating speed of a fan.
4.6 Setting the Upper and Lower Thresholds of the Temperature of the Fan Module
This section describes how to set the upper and lower thresholds of the temperature of the fan
module to control the temperature range of the optical module.
4.7 Resetting the LPU
This section describes how to reset the LPU.
4.8 Resetting the Slave Main Control Board
This section describes how to reset the slave main control board.
4.9 Configuring Master/Slave Switchover
This section describes how to configure master/slave switchover.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
38
4.1 Introduction to Hardware Management
This section describes the hardware management of the S9300.
Hardware management indicates the operations performed on hardware resources through
commands after the hardware is installed. Hardware configurations include reset, backup, and
power on and power off. Hardware configurations reduce the frequency at which hardware
resources are plugged in and pulled out or installed and uninstalled, which improves the
reliability of hardware resources.
4.2 Hardware Management Supported by the S9300
This section describes the hardware management operations supported by the S9300.
The S9300 supports the following hardware operations:
l Powering on and powering off the board
l Backing up the electronic label
l Resetting the LPU
l Resetting the slave main control board
l Master/slave switchover
4.3 Powering On and Off the Board
This section describes how to power on and off the board.
4.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before powering on or powering off a board, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you
complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
l Before removing a running board.
l After a board is installed to the slot.
Pre-configuration Tasks
None.
Data Preparation
To configure the commands for powering on or powering off the board, you need the following
data.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
39
No. Data
1 Slot number of the board to be powered off
2 Slot number of the board to be powered on

4.3.2 Powering Off a Board
Before removing a running board, power off the board.
Context
CAUTION
Before removing a running board, power off the board. For the procedure for removing a board,
see the Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch Quick Installation Guide.
Run the following command in any view of the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
power off slot slot-id
The board is powered off.
NOTE
This command is invalid for the master main control board.
----End
4.3.3 Powering On a Board
When the power status of a board is PowerOff, you need to power on the board. Then you can
run the board.
Context
Do as follows in any view of the S9300:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
power on slot slot-id
The board is powered on.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
40
4.3.4 Checking the Configuration
After a board is powered on or powered off, run the following commands to check the
configurations.
Context
Configuring power-on and power-off of the board is complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display power command in any view to check power status of the power supply of the
S9300.
Step 2 Run the display power system command in any view to check power of the power supply.
----End
Result
When the board is successfully powered off, you can view that the power status is PowerOff
after running this command; when the board is successfully powered on, you can view that the
power status is PowerOn after running this command.
4.4 Backing Up Electronic Labels
This section describes how to back up electronic labels.
4.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before backing up electronic labels, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
Electronic labels play an important role in handling network faults and replacing hardware in
batches. Therefore, backing up electronic labels is a must.
l When a fault occurs on the network, you can obtain information on related hardware
conveniently and accurately and improve the efficiency of the maintenance tasks (for
example, query on the maintenance cases of the knowledge base, preparation of spare
boards, and test of related indexes) through electronic labels. In addition, you can analyze
and trace the defects in the hardware efficiently by analyzing and collecting statistics on
the electronic labels of the faulty hardware.
l When you need to replace hardware in batches, you can obtain the distribution of hardware
in the whole network accurately through the electronic labels recorded in the archive
systems of clients' devices. In this manner, you can preestimate the impact of hardware
replacement and formulate corresponding policies to make batch hardware replacement be
more efficient.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
41
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before backing up electronic labels, ensure that the S9300 and the FTP server are routable.
Data Preparation
To back up electronic labels, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Name of the electronic label to be backed up
2 (Optional) Slot number of the electronic label
3 (Optional, applicable to backing up the electronic label to the FTP server) Address
of the FTP server, and user name and password
4 (Optional, applicable to backing up the electronic label to the TFTP server) Address
of the TFTP server

4.4.2 Backing Up Electronic Labels
The S9300 can back up electronic labels to the FTP server, TFTP server, or CF card.
Procedure
l Backing up electronic labels to a CF card
1. Run:
backup elabel filename slot-id
Electronic labels are backed up to a CF card.
This command can be run in any view.
l Backing up electronic labels to an FTP server
1. Run:
backup elabel ftp ftp-server-address filename username password slot-id
Electronic labels are backed up to an FTP server.
l Backing up electronic labels to a TFTP server
1. Run:
backup elabel tftp tftp-server-address filename slot-id
Electronic labels are backed up to a TFTP server.
----End
4.5 Setting the Rotating Speed of a Fan
This section describes how to set the rotating speed of a fan.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
42
4.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before adjusting the fan rotation speed, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
When the rotating speed of a fan does not adapt to the current application environment of the
device, you can adjust the rotating speed of the fan.
Pre-configuration Tasks
None.
Data Preparation
To configure the rotating speed of a fan, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Slot number of the fan module and the rotating speed of the fan

4.5.2 Setting the Rotating Speed of a Fan
You can adjust the fan rotation speed.
Context
You can check the upper and lower thresholds of board temperature and current temperature of
boards by using the display temperature { all | slot slot-id } command. If the temperature of a
board exceeds the upper threshold, you can adjust the fan speed on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
set fan-speed slot slot-id percent percent
The rotating speed of the fan is adjusted.
By default, fans run in automatic mode. In this mode, the system can adjust the fan speed when
detecting that the board temperature increases or decreases. The automatic mode reduces noises
and saves energy without affecting normal system running.
You can manually change the fan speed. By default, only users of level 2 and level 3 can run
the set fan-speed command to adjust the fan speed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
43
NOTE
If two fans are installed on a fan tray, both fans run at the configured speed after you run the set fan-
speed command.
----End
4.5.3 Checking the Configuration
After the fan rotation speed is adjusted, you can check the configurations.
Context
Adjusting the rotating speed of the fan is complete.
Procedure
l Run the display fan command to check the status, running mode, and rotating speed of the
fan.
----End
4.6 Setting the Upper and Lower Thresholds of the
Temperature of the Fan Module
This section describes how to set the upper and lower thresholds of the temperature of the fan
module to control the temperature range of the optical module.
4.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before setting the upper and lower thresholds of the fan module temperature, familiarize yourself
with the applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required
data. This helps you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
By setting the upper and lower thresholds of the temperature of the fan module, you can control
the optical module temperature in a range. When detecting that the optical module temperature
is lower than the lower threshold of the temperature of the fan module, the device slows down
the fan rotation speed. When detecting that the optical module temperature is higher than the
upper threshold of the temperature of the fan module, the device accelerates the fan rotation
speed.
Pre-configuration Tasks
None.
Data Preparation
To set the upper and lower thresholds of the temperature of the fan module, you need the
following data.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
44
No. Data
1 Lower threshold of the temperature of the fan module
2 Upper threshold of the temperature of the fan module
3 Slot ID of the fan module

4.6.2 Setting the Upper and Lower Temperature Thresholds for Fan
Speed Adjustment
You can set the upper and lower thresholds of the fan module temperature to control the
temperature in a proper range.
Context
By setting the upper and lower thresholds of the temperature, you can enable the fan module to
adjust the fan speed according to the temperature. When the temperature exceeds the upper
threshold, the fan module increases the fan speed to speed up heat dissipation. When the
temperature falls below the lower threshold, the fan module decreases the fan speed to save
power. In this way, the device temperature is controlled within a proper range.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
set transceiver temperature threshold low-temperature high-temperature { slot
subrack-id/slot-id | all }
The upper and lower temperature thresholds for fan speed adjustment are set.
By default, the lower threshold of the temperature is 40C and the upper threshold of the
temperature is 65C.
----End
4.6.3 Checking the Configuration
After the fan rotation speed thresholds are adjusted, you can check the configurations.
Prerequisite
The configurations of upper and lower temperature thresholds for adjusting the fan speed are
complete.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
45
Procedure
l Run the display transceiver temperature threshold { current | default } slot subrack-
id/slot-id command to view the upper and lower temperature thresholds for adjusting the
fan speed in the current configuration and default configuration.
----End
4.7 Resetting the LPU
This section describes how to reset the LPU.
4.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before resetting an LPU, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the
pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you complete the configuration
task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
When an LPU fails to be upgraded or is not working properly, reset the LPU.
Pre-configuration Tasks
None.
Data Preparation
To reset the LPU, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Slot number of the LPU to be reset

4.7.2 Resetting the LPU
When an LPU fails to be upgraded or is not working properly, reset the LPU.
Context
CAUTION
When an LPU is not working properly, try to locate and rectify the fault rather than resetting the
LPU directly to avoid service interruption.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
46
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
reset slot slot-id
The LPU in the specified slot is reset.
This command can be run in any view. By default, the LPU can be reset only by the users at the
configuration level and the management level.
----End
4.7.3 Checking the Configuration
After an LPU is reset, you can check the LPU status and resetting cause.
Context
Resetting the LPU is complete.
Procedure
l Run the display device command to check the LPU status.
l Run the display reset-reason [ slot slot-id ] command to check the reason for resetting the
LPU.
----End
4.8 Resetting the Slave Main Control Board
This section describes how to reset the slave main control board.
4.8.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before resetting the standby main control board, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you
complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
If you need to restart the slave main control board, perform this task. For example, in the scenario
where double main control boards are installed, after the slave main control board loads the
system software, you need to reset the slave main control board to validate the system software
without affecting the current service on the S9300.
Pre-configuration Tasks
None.
Data Preparation
None
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
47
4.8.2 Resetting the Slave Main Control Unit
To restart the standby main control board, you need to reset the standby main control board.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 whose slave main control board needs to be reset:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
slave restart
The slave main control board is reset.
----End
4.8.3 Checking the Configuration
After the standby main control board is reset, you can check the status and resetting cause of the
standby main control board.
Context
Resetting the slave main control board is complete.
Procedure
l Run the display device command to check the status of the slave main control board.
l Run the display reset-reason [ slot slot-id ] command to check the reason for resetting the
slave main control board.
----End
4.9 Configuring Master/Slave Switchover
This section describes how to configure master/slave switchover.
4.9.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before performing the active/standby switchover, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you
complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
When double main control boards are installed on the S9300, you can configure forcible master/
slave switchover through command lines.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
48
Pre-configuration Tasks
None.
Data Preparation
None
4.9.2 Enabling the Master/Slave Switchover
Before performing the active/standby switchover, ensure that the active/standby function is
enabled.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 that needs to be enabled with master/slave switchover:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
slave switchover enable
Master/slave switchover is enabled.
By default, master/slave switchover is enabled.
----End
4.9.3 Performing Master/Slave Switchover
Before performing master/slave switchover, make sure that the master and slave main control
boards run normally and meet the requirements for switchover.
Context
If the S9300 is in any of the following situations, do not perform master/slave switchover:
l The file system of the S9300 is in use. For example, a file or directory in the CF card is
being created, deleted, saved, or moved.
l The S9300 is loading or deleting information about the LPU, including the following
operations:
The LPU is pulled out or plugged in with power on.
The LPU is reset through commands.
l The memory sizes of the master and slave main control board are different.
When the S9300 performs master/slave switchover, you cannot pull out, plug in, or reset the
master and slave main control boards, LPUs, power modules, or fan modules. Otherwise, the
S9300 is restarted or fails.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
49
After master/slave switchover, the running master main control board of the S9300 is restarted.
After restart, the master main control board becomes the slave and the slave main control board
becomes the master.
Do as follows on the S9300 that needs to perform master/slave switchover:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
slave switchover
Master/slave switchover is performed.
----End
4.9.4 Checking the Configuration
After the active/standby switchover is complete, you can view the active/standby status on the
active and standby main control boards.
Context
Configuring master/slave switchover is complete.
Procedure
l Run the display switchover state command to check the status of master/slave switchover.
l Run the display device command to check the status of the master and slave main control
boards.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 4 Hardware Management
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
50
5 Information Center Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to configure the information center to control the output of logs,
alarms, and debugging messages.
5.1 Introduction to the Information Center
The information center works as the information hub of a switch. It classifies and filters the
output of a system. The information center uses a debugging program to help network
administrator and developers monitor network operation and analyze network faults.
5.2 Information Center Supported by the S9300
In the S9300, the information center outputs logs, alarms, and debugging messages with eight
severity levels to different directions through 10 information channels.
5.3 Enabling Log Output
This section describes how to output logs of a specified module to a log file, console, terminal,
or log host.
5.4 Enabling Alarm Output
You can configure a specific module to output alarm information to log files, consoles, terminals,
or SNMP agents.
5.5 Enabling the Output of Debugging Information
You can configure a specific module to output alarm information to log files, consoles, terminals,
or SNMP agents.
5.6 Maintaining Information Center
This section describes how to run the reset info-center statistics, reset logbuffer, or reset
trapbuffer command to delete messages in the buffer of the information center. Note that deleted
messages cannot be restored.
5.7 Information Center configuration Examples
This section provides configuration of the information center.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
51
5.1 Introduction to the Information Center
The information center works as the information hub of a switch. It classifies and filters the
output of a system. The information center uses a debugging program to help network
administrator and developers monitor network operation and analyze network faults.
5.2 Information Center Supported by the S9300
In the S9300, the information center outputs logs, alarms, and debugging messages with eight
severity levels to different directions through 10 information channels.
Information Classification
The information center receives and processes information of the following types:
l Logs
l Debugging information
l Alarms
Severity Levels of Information
Information has eight severity levels as shown in Table 5-1. The lower the severity level, the
severer the information.
Table 5-1 Description of the severity levels of information
Threshold Severity Level Description
0 Emergency A fatal fault, such as a programme exception or
incorrect use of the memory, occurs on the device. The
system must restart.
1 Alert An important fault, such as the device memory
reaching the highest limit, occurs on device. The fault
needs to be rectified immediately.
2 Critical A crucial fault occurs, such as the memory or
temperature reaches the lowest limit, the BFD device
is unreachable, or an internal fault is generated by the
device itself. The fault needs to be analyzed and
rectified.
3 Error A fault caused by an improper operation or a wrong
process occurs, for example, a user runs incorrect
commands, enters a wrong user password, or receives
wrong protocol packets from other devices.
The faults do not affect services but should be paid
attention to.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
52
Threshold Severity Level Description
4 Warning An abnormal situation of the running device occurs,
such as the user disables the routing process, BFD
detects packet loss, or the wrong protocol packet is
received.
The fault may affect services and should be paid
attention to.
5 Notice Indicates the key operations used to ensure that the
device runs normally, such as the execution of the
shutdown command, the performance of neighbor
discovery, or status change of the state machine.
6 Informational Indicates the common operations to ensure that the
device runs normally, such as the execution of the
display command.
7 Debugging Indicates the common device information needs not
be paid attention to.

When information filtering based on severity levels is enabled, only the information whose
severity level threshold is less than or equal to the configured value is output.
For example, if the severity level value is configured to 6, only information with the severity
level value ranging from 0 to 6 is output.
Working Process of the Information Center
The working process of the information center is as follows:
l The information center receives logs, alarms, and debugging information from all modules.
l The information center outputs information with different severity levels to different
information channels according to the configuration.
l Information is transmitted to different directions based on the association relationship
between the information channel and the output direction.
Generally, the information center distributes three types of information that can be classified
into eight levels to ten information channels. Information is then output to different directions.
As shown in Figure 5-1, logs, alarms, and debugging information have default output channels.
You can customize them to be output from other channels. For example, you can configure logs
to be output to the log cache through Channel 6 rather than the default Channel 4.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
53
Figure 5-1 Functions of the information channel
Information
channel
Console
Remote terminal
Loghost
Trap buffer
Log buffer
SNMP agent
Logs
Traps
Debugs
Output
direction
Direction of logs
Direction of alarms
Direction of debugging
information
Logfile
Console
SNMP agent
Monitor
Loghost
Logbuffer
Trapbuffer
0
1
2
3
4
5
channel6
channel7
channel8
channel9
6
7
8
9

Information Channels and Output Directions
The system supports ten channels. The first six channels (Channel 0 to Channel 5) have their
default channel names, and are associated with six output directions by default. log information
is output to log files through Channel 9 by default. That is, seven default output directions are
supported.
For details of the association relationship between default channels and output directions, see
Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Association relationship between information channels and output directions
Channel
Number
Default
Channel Name
Output
Direction
Description
0 Console Console Outputs logs, alarms, and debugging
information to the local console.
1 Monitor Monitor Outputs logs, alarms, and debugging
information to the VTY terminals for
remote maintenance.
2 Loghost Log host Outputs logs, alarms, and debugging
information to the log host. Information is
saved to a log host in the file format for easy
reference.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
54
Channel
Number
Default
Channel Name
Output
Direction
Description
3 Trapbuffer Trap buffer Outputs alarms to the alarm buffer. The
switch assigns a specified area to be the
alarm buffer for recording alarms.
4 Logbuffer Log buffer Outputs logs to the log buffer. The switch
assigns a specified area to be the log buffer
for recording logs.
5 Snmpagent SNMP agent Outputs alarms to the SNMP agent.
6 Unspecified Unspecified Reserved, this channel can be configured to
output to different directions.
7 Unspecified Unspecified Reserved, this channel can be configured to
output to different directions.
8 Unspecified Unspecified Reserved, this channel can be configured to
output to different directions.
9 Channel9 Log file Outputs logs, alarms and debugging
information to the log file on the CF card

In the case of multiple log hosts, logs can be output through one channel or several channels.
For example, some logs can be output to a log host through Channel 2 (loghost) and some logs
can be output to another log host through Channel 6. To manage channels conveniently, you can
change the name of Channel 6.
Format of Logs
Syslog is a sub-function of the information center. It outputs information to a log host through
port 514.
Figure 5-2 shows the format of logs.
Figure 5-2 Format of the output logs
<Int_16>TIMESTAMP HOSTNAME %%ddAAA/B/CCC(l):slot=XXX; YYYY

Table 5-3 describes each field in a log message.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
55
Table 5-3 Description of each field in a log message
Field Indication Description
<Int_16> Leading character Leading characters are added before logs are
output to log hosts.
Logs saved in the local device do not contain
leading characters.
TIMESTAMP Time to send out the
information
Available formats for the timestamp are as follows:
l boot: The timestamp in this format indicates a
relative time.
l date: The timestamp in this format indicates the
system time. Timestamps in logs, alarms and
debugging information are in this format by
default.
l short-date: Unlike the date format, timestamps
in the short-date format do not indicate the year.
l format-date: The timestamp in this format is
another format of the system time.
l none: indicates that the information does not
contain any timestamp.
There is a space between the timestamp and the
host name.
HOSTNAME Host name By default, the name is Quidway.
%% Huawei logo Indicates that log information is output by a
Huawei device.
dd Version number Identifies the version of the log format.
AAA Module name Indicates the name of the module that outputs
information to the information center.
B Log level Indicates the severity level of a log.
CCC Brief description Describes the information type.
(l) Information type Indicates the user log identifier.
slot=XXX Location information Indicates the number of the slot that sends the
location information.
YYYY Descriptor Indicates detailed information output from each
module to the information center.
Before outputting logs, each module fills this field
to describe contents of logs.

Format of Alarms
Figure 5-3 shows the format of the output alarms.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
56
Figure 5-3 Format of the output alarms
TimeStamp HostName ModuleName/Severity/BriefDescription

Table 5-4 describes each field in an alarm message.
Table 5-4 Description of each field of in an alarm message
Field Indication Description
TimeStamp Time to send out the
information
Available formats for the timestamp are as follows:
l boot: The timestamp in this format indicates a
relative time.
l date: The timestamp in this format indicates the
system time. Timestamps in logs, alarms and
debugging information are in this format by
default.
l short-date: Unlike the date format, timestamps
in the short-date format do not indicate the year.
l format-date: The timestamp in this format is
another format of the system time.
l none: indicates that the information does not
contain any timestamp.
There is a space between the timestamp and the
host name.
HostName Host name By default, the name is Quidway.There is a space
between the sysname and module name.
ModuleName Module name Indicates the name of the module that generates an
alarm.
Severity Severity level Severity levels available for an alarm message are
as follows:
l Critical
l Major
l Minor
l Warning
l Indeterminate
l Cleared
Brief Brief information Provides brief information of the alarms.
Description Description Provides detailed description of the alarms.

Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
57
5.3 Enabling Log Output
This section describes how to output logs of a specified module to a log file, console, terminal,
or log host.
5.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring the log output, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
The system logs the operation information about devices in real time. It then outputs logs to the
log buffer, log file, console, terminal, and log host for storage and future reference. In this
manner, when faults occur on devices, users can locate the faults based on the logs.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the log output, complete the following tasks:
l Connecting the switch to the PC properly
l Ensuring that the route between the switch and the log host is reachable
l Configuring an VPN instance
Data Preparation
To configure the log output, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 l Channel number
l Channel name
2 Module name
3 Address of the log host
4 Severity level of the log
5 (Optional) Size of the log buffer
6 (Optional) VPN instance name

5.3.2 Enabling the Information Center
By default, the information center is enabled. You can enable the information center in the event
that the information center is disabled.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
58
Context
The information center classifies and outputs information. When it is heavily loaded with
information processing, the system performance is affected.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
info-center enable
The information center is enabled.
By default, the information center is enabled.
----End
5.3.3 (Optional) Naming an Information Channel
Naming an information channel helps you understand what is output by each channel.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
info-center channel channel-number name channel-name
A channel is named.
----End
5.3.4 (Optional) Configuring the Function of Filtering Logs by IDs
The binary log function can filter specific logs.
Context
Binary logs provide the function of filtering specified logs by their IDs. To filter certain logs,
the user can obtain IDs of these logs through log resolution tools and add these IDs to the log
filtering list.
After that, the information center does not send these logs in each output direction.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
59
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
info-center filter-id { id } &<1-50>
One or more IDs are added and a space is used to separate these IDs.
NOTE
Currently, only 50 IDs can be shielded. The aggregation of these shielded IDs is called a log ID filtering
list. The log ID filtering list is arranged by ID values.
----End
5.3.5 (Optional) Configuring the Function of Generating a Data
Dictionary
To resolve log files on the log server, you need to transform binary logs into test logs through
the data dictionary.
Context
A data dictionary is the basis of resolution binary logs through tools. It can be used to resolve
binary logs to text logs. A data dictionary is the aggregation of log IDs and fixed information
required in the log, such as the level, mnemonic symbol, and format string. The generated data
dictionary is downloaded by the external resolution tools for resolution.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
info-center create-logbook { ftp ftp-address user-name user-name password password
[ file-name file-name | port-id port-number ]
*
}
The data dictionary is generated.
----End
5.3.6 Outputting Logs to the Log Buffer
After the information center is enabled, logs are output to the log buffer through Channel 4 by
default and the log buffer can cache a maximum of 512 logs.
Procedure
l Configuring the channel through which logs are output
1. Do as follows on the switch enabled with the information center, run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number |
channel-name } [ log { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
60
Logs are sent to the information channel.
Logs can be output only after the information center is enabled. .
l Configuring the channel through which logs are output
1. Do as follows on the switch enabled with the information center, run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center logbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } ]
The channel through which logs are output to the log buffer is configured.
3. (Optional) Run:
info-center logbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } | size
buffersize ]
*
The size of the log buffer is configured.
After the information center is enabled, logs are output to the log buffer through
Channel 4 by default and the log buffer can cache a maximum of 512 logs.
----End
5.3.7 Outputting Logs to a Log File
When a fault occurs on the device, you locate the fault based on information saved in the log
file.
Procedure
Step 1 Sending logsto a channel
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number |
channel-name } [ log { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Logs are sent the information channel.
Logs can be output only after the information center is enabled.
Step 2 Configuring the channel through which logs are output to the log file
1. Run:
info-center logfile channel { channel-number | channel-name }
The channel through which logs are output to the log file is configured.
Step 3 (Optional) Configuring the size of the log file output by the information center
1. Run:
info-center logfile size size
The size of the configuration file is set.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
61
By default, the size of log files is 8 M.
----End
5.3.8 Outputting Logs to the Console
By outputting logs to the console, you can view the operating status of the device on the console.
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the logs to be output through the channel
1. Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center, run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number |
channel-name } [ log { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Logs are added to the information channel.
Logs can be output only after the information center is enabled.
Step 2 Configuring the channel through which logs are output to the console
1. Run:
info-center console channel { channel-number | channel-name }
The channel through which logs are output to the Console is configured.
2. Run:
quit
Back to the user view.
Step 3 Enabling terminal display
1. Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center, run:
terminal monitor
Terminal display is enabled.
2. Run:
terminal logging
Displaying logs on the terminal is enabled.
----End
5.3.9 Outputting Logs to the Terminal
By outputting logs to the terminal, you can view the operating status of the device on the terminal.
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the logs to be output through the channel
1. Run:
system-view
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
62
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number |
channel-name } [ log { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Logs are added to the information channel.
Logs can be output only after the information center is enabled.
Step 2 Configuring the information channel through which logs are output to the terminal
1. Run:
info-center monitor channel { channel-number | channel-name }
The information channel through which logs are output to the terminal is configured.
2. Run:
quit
Back to the user view.
Step 3 Enabling terminal display
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
terminal monitor
Terminal display is enabled.
2. Run:
terminal logging
Displaying logs on the terminal is enabled.
----End
5.3.10 Outputting Logs to the Log Host
By outputting logs to the log host, you can view the operating status of the device on the log
host.
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the logs to be output through the channel
1. Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center, run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number |
channel-name } [ log { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Logs are added to the information channel.
Step 2 Configuring the channel through which logs are output to the log host
l (On an IPv4 network) Run:
info-center loghost ip-address [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } |
facility local-number |
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
63
{ language language-name | binary [ port ] } | { vpn-instance vpn-instance-name
| public-net } ]
*
The channel through which logs are output to the log host is configured.
By default, logs are not output to the log host after the information center is enabled.
The system supports the configuration of a maximum of eight log hosts to realize backup
among log hosts.
l (On an IPv6 network) Run:
info-center loghost ipv6 ipv6-address [ channel { channel-number | channel-
name } | facility local-number | { language language-name | binary [ port ] } ]
*
The channel through which logs are output to the log host is configured.
By default, logs are not output to the log host.
The system supports the configuration of a maximum of eight log hosts to implement backup
among log hosts.
----End
5.3.11 Checking the Configuration
Checking the Configuration of Information Center
Prerequisite
The configurations of the Information Center function are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ] command to check the
configuration of a channel.
l Run the display info-center [ statistics ] command to check the information recorded by
an information center.
l Run the display logbuffer [ level severity | size value | slot slot-id ]
*
command to view
the information recorded by a log buffer.
l Run the display info-center filter-id [ id ] command to check whether the ID of a single
log is added into the filtering list.
l Run the display info-center filter-id command to check whether IDs of all logs are added
into the filtering list.
----End
Example
Run the display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ] command to check the contents of
information channels.
<Quidway> display channel
channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging
channel number:1, channel name:monitor
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging
416c0000 BFD Y debugging Y debugging Y debugging
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
64
channel number:2, channel name:loghost
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y informational Y debugging N debugging
channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default N informational Y warning N debugging
channel number:4, channel name:logbuffer
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning N debugging N debugging
channel number:5, channel name:snmpagent
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default N debugging Y warning N debugging
channel number:6, channel name:channel6
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging
channel number:7, channel name:channel7
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging
channel number:8, channel name:channel8
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging
channel number:9, channel name:channel9
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging
Run the display info-center command to check the contents of information center.
<Quidway> display info-center
Information Center:enabled
Log host:
100.1.1.1, channel number 2, channel name loghost,
language english , host facility local5
Console:
channel number : 0, channel name : console
Monitor:
channel number : 1, channel name : monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 512,
current messages 9, channel number : 3, channel name : trapbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 0
Trap buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,
current messages 32, channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 0
logfile:
channel number : 9, channel name : channel9, language : english
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot
Sent messages = 2646, Received messages = 10395
IO Reg messages = 160 IO Sent messages = 7750
Run the display logbuffer [ level severity | size value | slot slot-id ]
*
command to view the logs
in the log buffer.
<Quidway> display logbuffer
Logging buffer configuration and contents : enabled
Allowed max buffer size : 1024
Actual buffer size : 512
Channel number : 4 , Channel name : logbuffer
Dropped messages : 0
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
65
Overwritten messages : 0
Current messages : 1
Feb 13 2007 20:05:46.523.1 Quidway %%01SHELL/4/CMDRECORD(l):task:vt0 ip:100.1.1.48
user:** command:info-center timestamp log date precision-time millisecond
Run the display info-center filter-id [ id ] command to check whether the log with the ID being
1098649600 is added into the filtering list.
<Quidway> display info-center filter-id 1098649600
ID : 1098649600
Module : TE_TUNNEL
Alias : NOTIFY_LSPM_FAIL
Content : LSPM return error to TE when processing tunnel commit event!
(TunnelName=[STRING], ErrorCode=[ULONG])
Filtered Number : 0
Run the display info-center filter-id command to check whether IDs of all logs are added into
the filtering list.
<Quidway> display info-center filter-id
ID : 1077481488
Module : SHELL
Alias : AUTHCMDSNDMSGFAIL
Content : [string]
Filtered Number : 0

ID : 1079676930
Module : VTY
Alias : AUTHENTIMEOUT
Content : Refresh route to slot [ULONG].
Filtered Number : 0
5.4 Enabling Alarm Output
You can configure a specific module to output alarm information to log files, consoles, terminals,
or SNMP agents.
5.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring the alarm output, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
The device can generate alarms in specific situations to draw attention of the administrators.
Alarms can be output to the alarm buffer, log file, Console, terminal, and Network Management
System (NMS), through which the administrator can easily locate and rectify the fault.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before enabling alarm output, complete the following tasks:
l Connecting the switch and the NM station correctly
l Configuring routes between the switch and the NM station
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
66
Data Preparation
To configure alarm output, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 l Channel number
l Channel name
2 Module name
3 Severity level of alarms
4 (Optional) Size of an alarm buffer
5 IP address of Network Management System

5.4.2 Enabling the Information Center
By default, the information center is enabled. You can enable the information center in the event
that the information center is disabled.
Context
Classifying and outputting a large amount of information affects the performance of the system.
Do as follows on the switch.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
info-center enable
The information center is enabled.
By default, the information center is enabled.
----End
5.4.3 (Optional) Naming the Information Channel
Naming information channels helps you understand what is output by each channel.
Context
Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
67
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
info-center channel channel-number name channel-name
The information channel specified by the channel-number is named as channel-name.
----End
5.4.4 Outputting Alarms to the Alarm Buffer
By default, alarms are output to the alarm buffer through a default channel. You can configure
alarms to be output through a specific channel.
Context
Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center:
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the alarms to be output through the channel
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-
name } [ trap { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Alarms are added to the information channel.
By default, the timestamp format of alarms is date.
Step 2 Configuring the channel through which alarms are output to the alarm buffer
1. Run:
info-center trapbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } ]
The alarm buffer is set to receive information.
2. Run:
(optional)info-center trapbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name }
| size buffersize ]
*
The channel through which alarms are output to the alarm buffer is configured.
After the information center is enabled, alarms default to be output through Channel 3 to
the alarm buffer and the alarm buffer can contain 256 pieces of information.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
68
5.4.5 Outputting Alarms to the Log File
When a fault occurs on the device, you can analyze the output alarms to provide references for
fault location.
Context
Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
1. Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center, run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-
name } [ trap { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Alarms are added to the information channel.
By default, the timestamp format of alarms is date.
Step 2 Configuring the channel through which alarms are output to the log file
1. Run:
info-center logfile channel { channel-number | channel-name }
The channel through which alarms are output to the log file is configured.
By default, alarms are output through Channel 9 to the log file after the information center
is enabled.
Step 3 (Optional) Configuring the size of the log file output by the Information Center
1. Run:
info-center logfile size size
By default, the size of log files is 8 M.
----End
5.4.6 Outputting Alarms to the Console
By outputting alarms to the console, you can view the operating status of the device on the
console.
Context
Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center:
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the alarms to be output through the channel
1. Run:
system-view
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
69
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-
name } [ trap { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Alarms are added to the information channel.
By default, the timestamp format of debugging information is date.
Step 2 Configuring the channel through which alarms are output to the console
1. Run:
info-center console channel { channel-number | channel-name }
The channel through which alarms are output to the Console is configured.
By default, alarms are output to the Console through Channel 0.
2. Run:
quit
Back to the user view.
Step 3 Enabling terminal display
1. Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center, run:
terminal monitor
Terminal display is enabled.
2. Run:
terminal trapping
Displaying alarms on the terminal is enabled.
----End
5.4.7 Outputting Alarms to the Terminal
By outputting alarms to the terminal, you can view the operating status of the device on the
terminal.
Context
Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center:
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the alarms to be output through the channel
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-
name } [ trap { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Alarms are added to the information channel.
By default, the timestamp format of alarms is date.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
70
Step 2 Configuring the channel through which alarms are output to the VTY terminal
1. Run:
info-center monitor channel { channel-number | channel-name }
The channel through which alarms are output to the VTY terminal is configured.
By default, alarms are output to the VTY terminal through Channel 1.
2. Run:
quit
Back to the user view.
Step 3 Enabling terminal display
1. Run:
terminal monitor
Terminal display is enabled.
2. Run:
terminal trapping
Displaying alarms on the terminal is enabled.
----End
5.4.8 Outputting Alarms to the SNMP Agent
By outputting alarms to the SNMP agent, you can view the operating status of the device on the
NMS.
Context
Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center:
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the alarms to be output through the channel
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-
name } [ trap { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Alarms are added to the information channel.
By default, the timestamp format of alarms is date.
Step 2 Configuring the channel through which alarms are output to the SNMP agent
1. Run:
info-center snmp channel { channel-number | channel-name }
The channel through which alarms are output to the SNMP agent is configured.
2. Run:
snmp-agent
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
71
SNMP agent is enabled.
By default, alarms are output to the SNMP agent through Channel 5.
----End
5.4.9 Checking the Configuration
After configuring the alarm output, you can use related commands to confirm the configuration.
Prerequisite
The configurations of the Alarm output function are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ] command to check the
configuration of a channel.
l Run the display info-center [ statistics ] command to check the information recorded by
the information center.
l Run the display trapbuffer [ size value ] command to check the information recorded by
the alarm buffer.
----End
Example
Run the display info-center command to show channels.
<Quidway> display channel
channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging
channel number:1, channel name:monitor
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging
416c0000 BFD Y debugging Y debugging Y debugging
channel number:2, channel name:loghost
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y informational Y debugging N debugging
channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default N informational Y warning N debugging
channel number:4, channel name:logbuffer
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning N debugging N debugging
channel number:5, channel name:snmpagent
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default N debugging Y warning N debugging
channel number:6, channel name:channel6
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging
channel number:7, channel name:channel7
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
72
channel number:8, channel name:channel8
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging
channel number:9, channel name:channel9
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging
Run the display info-center command to show the data recorded by info-center.
<Quidway> display info-center
Information Center:enabled
Log host:
Console:
channel number : 0, channel name : console
Monitor:
channel number : 1, channel name : monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 512,
current messages 92, channel number : 4, channel name : logbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 0
Trap buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,
current messages 30, channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 0
logfile:
channel number : 9, channel name : channel9, language : english
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot
Sent messages = 425, Received messages = 634
IO Reg messages = 160 IO Sent messages = 210
Run the display trapbuffer command. If alarms in the alarm buffer are displayed, it means that
the configuration succeeds.
<Quidway> display trapbuffer
Trapping buffer configuration and contents:enabled
allowed max buffer size : 1024
actual buffer size : 256
channel number : 3 , channel name : trapbuffer
dropped messages : 0
overwritten messages : 0
current messages : 250
#May 12 2009 22:43:10 Quidway IFNET/4/IF_PVCUP:OID 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 Interface
201326849 turned into UP state.
5.5 Enabling the Output of Debugging Information
You can configure a specific module to output alarm information to log files, consoles, terminals,
or SNMP agents.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
73
Context
CAUTION
Debugging affects the performance of the system. Thus, after debugging, run the undo
debugging all command to disable debugging immediately. When the CPU usage is close to
100%, debugging ARP may cause the board resetting. So, confirm the action before you use the
command.
5.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring the debugging message output, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
When faults occur on a device, you can enable the information center to output debugging
information for easy faults location and analysis.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before enabling the output of debugging information, complete the following tasks:
l Connecting the switch and the PC correctly
l Configuring routes between the switch and the log host
Data Preparation
To enable the output of debugging information, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 l Channel number
l Channel name
2 Module name
3 Severity level of debugging information
4 IP address of a log host

5.5.2 Enabling the Information Center
By default, the information center is enabled. You can enable the information center in the event
that the information center is disabled.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
74
Context
Classifying and outputting a large amount of information affects the performance of the system.
Do as follows on the switch.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
info-center enable
The information center is enabled.
By default, the information center is enabled.
----End
5.5.3 (Optional) Naming the Information Channel
Naming information channels helps you understand what is output by each channel.
Context
Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
info-center channel channel-number name channel-name
The name of the specified channel is set.
----End
5.5.4 Outputting Debugging Information to the Log File
When a fault occurs on the device, you can analyze the output debugging messages to provide
references for fault location.
Context
Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center:
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring Debugging Information to be output through the Channel
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
75
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-
name } [ debug { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Debugging information is added to the information channel.
By default, the timestamp format of debugging information is date and the precision is
millisecond.
Step 2 Configuring the Channel through which debugging information is output to the Log File
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center logfile channel { channel-number | channel-name }
The channel through which debugging information is output to the log file is configured.
Step 3 (Optional) Configuring the Size of the Log File Output by the Information Center
1. Run:
info-center logfile size size
By default, the debugging information is not saved in the log file. If you want the debugging
information to be saved in the log file, run the info-center source default channel 9
debug state on level severity command to add records to the information channel.
----End
5.5.5 Outputting Debugging Information to the Console
When you log in to the device through a console, you can output debugging messages to the
console for query in real time.
Context
Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center:
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring Debugging Information to be output through the Channel
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-
name } [ debug { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Debugging information is added to the information channel.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
76
By default, the timestamp format of debugging information is date and the precision is
millisecond.
Step 2 Configuring the Channel through which debugging information is output to the Console
1. Run:
info-center console channel { channel-number | channel-name }
The channel through which debugging information is output to the Console is configured.
2. Run:
quit
Back to the user view.
Step 3 Enabling terminal display
1. Run:
terminal monitor
Terminal display is enabled.
2. Run:
terminal debugging
Displaying debugging information on the terminal is enabled.
----End
5.5.6 Outputting Debugging Information to the Terminal
When you log in to the device through a terminal, you can output debugging messages to the
terminal for query in real time.
Context
Do as follows on the switch configured with the information center:
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring Debugging Information to be output through the Channel
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-
name } [ debug { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Debugging information is added to the information channel.
By default, the timestamp format of debugging information is date and the precision is
millisecond.
Step 2 Configuring the Channel through which debugging information is output to the Terminal
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
77
2. Run:
info-center monitor channel { channel-number | channel-name }
The channel through which debugging information is output to the terminal is configured.
3. Run:
quit
Back to the user view.
Step 3 Enabling Terminal Display
1. Run:
terminal monitor
Terminal display is enabled.
2. Run:
terminal debugging
Displaying debugging information on the terminal is enabled.
----End
5.5.7 Outputting Debugging Information to the Log Host
By outputting debugging messages to the log host, you can view debugging messages more
conveniently.
Procedure
Step 1 Configuring Debugging Information to be output through the Channel
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
info-center source { module-name | default } channel { channel-number | channel-
name } [ debug { state { off | on } | level severity }
*
]
Debugging information is added to the information channel.
Step 2 Configuring the Channel through which debugging information is output to the Log Host
l (On an IPv4 network) Run:
info-center loghost ip-address [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } |
facility local-number |
{ language language-name | binary [ port ] } | { vpn-instance vpn-instance-
name| public-net } ]
*
The channel through which debugging information is output to the log host is configured.
By default, debugging information is not output to the log host after the information center
is enabled.
The system supports the configuration of a maximum of eight log hosts to realize backup
among log hosts.
l (On an IPv6 network) Run:
info-center loghost ipv6 ipv6-address [ channel { channel-number | channel-
name } | facility local-number | { language language-name | binary [ port ] } ]
*
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
78
The channel through which debugging information is output to the log host is configured.
By default, debugging information is not output to the log host after the information center
is enabled.
The system supports the configuration of a maximum of eight log hosts to realize backup
among log hosts.
----End
5.5.8 Checking the Configuration
After configuring the debugging message output, you can view the configuration of the
information center.
Prerequisite
The configurations of the Debugging Information function are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ] command to check the
configuration of a channel.
l Run the display info-center [ statistics ] command to check the information recorded by
an information center.
----End
Example
Run the display channel command. For example:
<Quidway> display channel 0
channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging
416e0000 ARP Y warning Y debugging Y debugging
Run the display info-center command. For example:
<Quidway> display info-center
Information Center:enabled
Log host:
Console:
channel number : 0, channel name : console
Monitor:
channel number : 1, channel name : monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 512,
current messages 512, channel number : 4, channel name : logbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 411
Trap buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,
current messages 256, channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 12
logfile:
channel number : 9, channel name : channel9, language : English
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot
Sent messages = 7922, Received messages = 22927
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
79
IO Reg messages = 92 IO Sent messages = 15006
5.6 Maintaining Information Center
This section describes how to run the reset info-center statistics, reset logbuffer, or reset
trapbuffer command to delete messages in the buffer of the information center. Note that deleted
messages cannot be restored.
Context
CAUTION
Statistics about the information center cannot be restored after being cleared. So, confirm the
action before you use the command.
Procedure
l To clear statistics about the information center, run the reset info-center statistics
command in the user view.
l To clear statistics about the log buffer, run the reset logbuffer command in the user view.
l To clear statistics about the alarm buffer, run the reset trapbuffer command in the user
view.
----End
5.7 Information Center configuration Examples
This section provides configuration of the information center.
5.7.1 Example for Outputting Logs to the Log File
This part describes how to output logs of a specific module or specific severity level to the log
file. This facilitates maintenance engineers to monitor the operating status of the device and
locate the fault occurred on the device by checking the output logs.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 5-4, Switch A is required to transport logs to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
server so that maintenance engineers can easily obtain the operation status of Switch A and
locate the faults occurring on Switch A.
Figure 5-4 Networking diagram of outputting logs to the log file
FTP Server
SwitchA
IP network
10.1.1.1/16
10.2.1.1/16
GE1/0/1
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
80

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Enable the information center.
2. Configure the contents of the logs to be output.
3. Configure the channel through which logs are output.
4. Set logs to be output to the FTP server.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP address of each interface
l Information channel number
l Module enabled to output logs
l Severity levels of logs
l Language in which logs are output
l IP address of the FTP server
l User name and password of the FTP server
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the routing protocol to make the switch and the FTP server reachable. (The detailed
procedure is not mentioned here.)
Step 2 Configure user name and password used on the FTP server. (The configuration details are not
provided here.)
Step 3 Configure the channel used to output logs.
# Enable the information center.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchA
[SwitchA] info-center enable
Step 4 Configure the logs to be output through the channel.
# Configure the module enabled to output logs and the severity levels of logs allowed to be
output.
[SwitchA] info-center source ip channel channel9 log level warnings
Step 5 Configure the channel through which logs are output.
# Configure the channel through which logs are output to the log file.
[SwitchA] info-center logfile channel channel9
[SwitchA] quit
Step 6 Set logs to be output to the FTP server.
# Log in to the FTP server.
<SwitchA> ftp 10.1.1.1
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
81
# Set logs to be output to the FTP server.
[SwitchA-ftp] put log.log
[SwitchA-ftp] quit
<SwitchA>
Step 7 Verify the configuration.
# View the logs output through the channel.
<SwitchA> display info-center
Information Center:enabled
logfile:
channel number : 9, channel name : channel9, language : english
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot
Sent messages = 5753, Received messages = 5866
IO Reg messages = 124 IO Sent messages = 114
# View the received logs on the FTP server. (The display is omitted here.)
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname SwitchA
#
info-center source IP channel 9 log level warnings
#
#
vlan 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.2.1.1 255.255.0.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
ip route-static 10.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.2.1.2
#
return
5.7.2 Example for Outputting Logs to Log Hosts
This part describes how to output logs of different modules or severity levels to different log
hosts, and how to configure backup log hosts for backing up logs.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 5-5, it is required to output logs of multiple types and severity levels to
different log hosts through information channels.
Switch sends the logs (with the severity level as notification) generated on the Forwarding
Information Base (FIB) module and the IP module to the log host Server 1. Server 3 functions
as a backup switch of Server 1.
Switch sends the logs (with the severity level as warning) generated on the Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP) module and the AAA module to the log host Server 1. Server 4 functions as a
backup switch of Server 2.
Both the Switch s and the log hosts require to be configured.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
82
Figure 5-5 Networking diagram of outputting logs to the log host
172.168.0.1/24
GE1/0/1
Switch
Server1
Server 2
Server 4
Server 3
10.1.1.2/24 10.1.1.1/24
10.2.1.1/24
10.2.1.2/24

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Enable the information center.
2. Name the tunnel.
3. Specify the module enabled to output logs.
4. Configure the channel for outputting logs.
5. Configure the source interface that sends logs.
6. Configure the log host.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP address of the log host
l Information channel number
l Name of the channel through which logs are output
l Module enabled to output logs
l Information severity level
l Language in which the log is output
Procedure
Step 1 Configure routing protocols to make the switch and log server routable. (The detailed procedure
is not mentioned here.)
Step 2 Configure the channel for outputting logs.
# Enable the information center.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] info-center enable
Step 3 Name the channel.
# Name the channel through which logs are output.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
83
[Quidway] info-center channel 6 name loghost1
Step 4 Configure the channel through which logs are output.
# Configure the module enabled to output logs and the severity levels of logs allowed to be
output.
[Quidway] info-center source fib channel loghost log level notifications
[Quidway] info-center source ip channel loghost log level notifications
[Quidway] info-center source ppp channel loghost1 log level warnings
[Quidway] info-center source aaa channel loghost1 log level warnings
Step 5 Configure the source interface that sends logs.
# Configure the source interface that sends logs.
[Quidway] info-center loghost source vlanif 10
Step 6 Configure the logs to be output to a specified log host.
# Specify Server 1 as the log server and Server 3 as the backup log server to receive the logs
from the FIB module and the IP module. The logs are output in English, by Local2.
[Quidway] info-center loghost 10.1.1.1 channel loghost facility local2 language
english
[Quidway] info-center loghost 10.1.1.2 channel loghost facility local2 language
english
# Specify Server 2 as the log server and Server 4 as the backup log server to receive the logs
from the PPP module and the AAA module. The logs are output by Local4.
[Quidway] info-center loghost 10.2.1.1 channel loghost1 facility local4 language
english
[Quidway] info-center loghost 10.2.1.2 channel loghost1 facility local4 language
english
Step 7 Configure the log server.
A log server is used to collect logs of the device because the storage memory of the switch is
not large enough to record the generated logs.
Log servers can be installed with UNIX or LINUX operating system or with the log software of
the third party.
If being installed with UNIX or LINUX operating system, the host can collect logs when enabled
with Syslog.
Take the host installed with LINUX operating system as an example.
l To create log files:
Run the touch loghost.info command in the directory /var/log to create a file loghost.info
to record logs of the switch.
l To edit configuration files:
Edit etc/syslog.conf to loghost.info /var/log/switch.log, that is specify the log host name. The
logs with the severity level as informational are then output to /var/log/loghost.log of the
system.
l To configure the file etc/sysconfig/syslog:
Modify syslogd_options="-m o" to syslogd_option="-1 -m o", enabling the system to record
the logs of the remote devices.
l To enable Syslog:
Run the service syslog restart command.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
84
For the host installed with the log software of a third party, you can configure the log software
of the third party to implement the log collection function on the host. For example, the HUAWEI
iManager 2000 supports the log management function and hence can receive, filter, save, and
forward the Syslog messages sent by the device or triggers other actions.
For the procedure for configuring log services on the HUAWEI iManager N200, refer to the
HUAWEI iManager N2000 DM - Compound Package User Manual Volume I.
Step 8 Verify the configuration.
# Display the configuration of the log host.
<Quidway> display info-center
Information Center:enabled
Log host:
the interface name of the source address:Vlanif10
10.1.1.1, channel number 2, channel name loghost,
language english , host facility
local2
10.1.1.2, channel number 2, channel name loghost,
language english , host facility
local2
10.2.1.1, channel number 6, channel name loghost1
language english , host facility
local4
10.2.1.2, channel number 6, channel name loghost1
language english , host facility
local4
Console:
channel number : 0, channel name : console
Monitor:
channel number : 1, channel name : monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 512,
current messages 50, channel number : 4, channel name : logbuffer
dropped messages 13, overwritten messages 3
Trap buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,
current messages 2, channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 0
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot
Sent messages = 683, Received messages = 682
IO Reg messages = 0 IO Sent messages = 0
----End
Configuration Files
#
info-center channel 6 name loghost1
info-center source FIB channel loghost channel 2 log level notification
info-center source IP channel 2 log level notification
info-center source PPP channel 6 log level warning
info-center source AAA channel 6 log level warning
info-center loghost source Vlanif10
info-center loghost 10.1.1.1 facility local2
info-center loghost 10.1.1.2 facility local2
info-center loghost 10.2.1.1 channel 6 facility local4
info-center loghost 10.2.1.2 channel 6 facility local4
#
vlan 10
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
85
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 172.16.0.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
ip route-static 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.0.2
ip route-static 10.2.1.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.0.2
#
return
5.7.3 Example for Configuring Log Messages to be Output to the
Log Host on the Public Network when the Management VPN
Instance Is used
Output logs of multiple types and severity levels to different log hosts through information
channels.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 5-6, it is required to output logs of multiple types and severity levels to
different log hosts through information channels.
Switch sends the logs (with the severity level as notification) generated on the Forwarding
Information Base (FIB) module and the IP module to the log host Server 1. Server 3 functions
as a backup switch of Server 1.
Switch sends the logs (with the severity level as warning) generated on the Point-to-Point
Protocol (PPP) module and the AAA module to the log host Server 1. Server 4 functions as a
backup switch of Server 2.
Both the switchs and the log hosts require to be configured.
A management VPN instance is configured on the switch.
Figure 5-6 Networking diagram of configuring log messages to be output to the log host on the
public network when the management VPN instance is used
172.168.0.1/24
GE1/0/1
Switch
Server1
Server 2
Server 4
Server 3
10.1.1.2/24 10.1.1.1/24
10.2.1.1/24
10.2.1.2/24

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
86
1. Enable the information center.
2. Name the tunnel.
3. Specify the module enabled to output logs.
4. Configure the channel for outputting logs.
5. Configure the source interface that sends logs.
6. Configure the log host.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l IP address of the log host
l Information channel number
l Name of the channel through which logs are output
l Module enabled to output logs
l Information severity level
l Language in which the log is output
Procedure
Step 1 Configure routing protocols to make the switch and log server routable. (The detailed procedure
is not mentioned here.)
Step 2 Configure the channel for outputting logs.
# Enable the information center.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] info-center enable
Step 3 Name the channel.
# Name the channel through which logs are output.
[Quidway] info-center channel 6 name loghost1
Step 4 Configure the channel through which logs are output.
# Configure the module enabled to output logs and the severity levels of logs allowed to be
output.
[Quidway] info-center source fib channel loghost log level notifications
[Quidway] info-center source ip channel loghost log level notifications
[Quidway] info-center source ppp channel loghost1 log level warnings
[Quidway] info-center source aaa channel loghost1 log level warnings
Step 5 Configure the source interface that sends logs.
# Configure the source interface that sends logs.
[Quidway] info-center loghost source vlanif 10
Step 6 Configure the logs to be output to a specified log host.
# Specify Server 1 as the log server and Server 3 as the backup log server to receive the logs
from the FIB module and the IP module. The logs are output in English, by Local2.
[Quidway] info-center loghost 10.1.1.1 public-net facility local2 language english
[Quidway] info-center loghost 10.1.1.2 public-net facility local2 language english
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
87
# Specify Server 2 as the log server and Server 4 as the backup log server to receive the logs
from the PPP module and the AAA module. The logs are output by Local4.
[Quidway] info-center loghost 10.2.1.1 public-net channel loghost1 facility local4
language english
[Quidway] info-center loghost 10.2.1.2 public-net channel loghost1 facility local4
language english
Step 7 Configure the log server.
A log server is used to collect logs of the device because the storage memory of the switch is
not large enough to record the generated logs.
Log servers can be installed with UNIX or LINUX operating system or with the log software of
the third party.
If being installed with UNIX or LINUX operating system, the host can collect logs when enabled
with Syslog.
Take the host installed with LINUX operating system as an example.
l To create log files:
Run the touch loghost.info command in the directory /var/log to create a file loghost.info
to record logs of the switch.
l To edit configuration files:
Edit etc/syslog.conf to loghost.info /var/log/switch.log, that is specify the log host name. The
logs with the severity level as informational are then output to /var/log/loghost.log of the
system.
l To configure the file etc/sysconfig/syslog:
Modify syslogd_options="-m o" to syslogd_option="-1 -m o", enabling the system to record
the logs of the remote devices.
l To enable Syslog:
Run the service syslog restart command.
For the host installed with the log software of a third party, you can configure the log software
of the third party to implement the log collection function on the host. For example, the HUAWEI
iManager 2000 supports the log management function and hence can receive, filter, save, and
forward the Syslog messages sent by the device or triggers other actions.
For the procedure for configuring log services on the HUAWEI iManager N200, refer to the
HUAWEI iManager N2000 DM - Compound Package User Manual Volume I.
Step 8 Verify the configuration.
# Display the configuration of the log host.
<Quidway> display info-center
Information Center:enabled
Log host:
the interface name of the source address:vlanif 10
10.1.1.1, channel number 2, channel name loghost,
language english , host facility
local2
10.1.1.2, channel number 2, channel name loghost,
language english , host facility
local2
10.2.1.1, channel number 6, channel name loghost1
language english , host facility
local4
10.2.1.2, channel number 6, channel name loghost1
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
88
language english , host facility
local4
Console:
channel number : 0, channel name : console
Monitor:
channel number : 1, channel name : monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 512,
current messages 50, channel number : 4, channel name : logbuffer
dropped messages 13, overwritten messages 3
Trap buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,
current messages 2, channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 0
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot
Sent messages = 683, Received messages = 682
IO Reg messages = 0 IO Sent messages = 0
----End
Configuration Files
#
info-center channel 6 name loghost1
info-center source FIB channel 2 log level notifications
info-center source IP channel 2 log level notification
info-center source PPP channel 6 log level warning
info-center source AAA channel 6 log level warning
info-center loghost source Vlanif10
info-center loghost 10.1.1.1 public-net facility local2
info-center loghost 10.1.1.2 public-net facility local2
info-center loghost 10.2.1.1 public-net channel 6 facility local4
info-center loghost 10.2.1.2 public-net channel 6 facility local4
#
vlan 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 172.16.0.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
ip route-static 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.0.2
ip route-static 10.2.1.0 255.255.255.0 172.16.0.2
#
return
5.7.4 Example for Configuring Binary Logs to be sent to the Log Host
This part describes how to output logs to the log host in binary mode. Outputting logs in binary
mode can effectively lighten the network load.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 5-7, binary logs generated on Switch A are sent to the log host in real time.
Users or maintenance personnel can analyze the log through log analysis tools and locate the
fault.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
89
Figure 5-7 Example for Configuring Binary Logs to be sent to the Log Host
SwitchA Loghost
GE1/0/1
10.1.1.1/24
10.1.1.6/24

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Enable the information center on the switch.
2. Add the ID of a log to be filtered.
3. Generate a data dictionary and send it to the log server.
4. Configure binary logs to be sent to the log host.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need to perform the following data:
l ID of the log to be filtered
l File name of the generated data dictionary
l IP address of the FTP server
l User name and password used for logging into the FTP server
l IP address of the log host
Procedure
Step 1 Configure routes between Switch A and Loghost. (The detailed procedure is not mentioned here.)
Step 2 Enable the information center.
# Enable the information center.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] info-center enable
Step 3 Add the ID of a log to be filtered.
# Configure the module and channel used to output alarm messages.
[Quidway] info-center filter-id 1077514264
Step 4 Generate a data dictionary and send it to the log server.
# Configure alarm messages to be output to the SNMP agent.
[Quidway] info-center create-logbook ftp 10.1.1.6 user-name ftp password ftp file-
name dicx.xml
After the data dictionary is sent successfully, a prompt is displayed indicating Info: Succeeded
in creating a data dictionary.. For further confirmation, you can check whether the data
dictionary is successfully sent to the log server.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
90
Step 5 Configure binary logs to be sent to the log host.
[Quidway] info-center loghost 10.1.1.6 binary
Step 6 Verify the configuration.
# Check the added ID of the log to be filtered.
[Quidway] display info-center filter-id 1077514264
ID: 1077514264
Content: task: [string] ip: [string] user: [string] command: [string]
Filtered Number: 3
# Check the channel used by the SNMP agent to output alarms.
[Quidway] display info-center
Information Center:enabled
Log host:
10.1.1.1, channel number 2, channel name loghost,
language english , host facility local7, binary
loghost
Console:
channel number : 0, channel name : console
Monitor:
channel number : 1, channel name : monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 5, channel name : snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 512,
current messages 512, channel number : 4, channel name : logbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 14
Trap buffer:
enabled,max buffer size 1024, current buffer size 256,
current messages 256, channel number:3, channel name:trapbuffer
dropped messages 0, overwritten messages 238
logfile:
channel number : 9, channel name : channel9, language : english
Information timestamp setting:
log - formate-date millisecond, trap - date, debug - date
Sent messages = 49890, Received messages = 50171
IO Reg messages = 123 IO Sent messages = 282
----End
Configuration Files
#
vlan 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.1.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
info-center filter-id 1077514264
info-center loghost 10.1.1.6 binary
#
return
5.7.5 Example for Outputting Alarms to the SNMP Agent
After alarms are output to the SNMP agent, the NM Station can receive the alarms sent from
the device.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
91
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 5-8, alarms are required to be output first to the SNMP agent and then be
transmitted to the NM Station through SNMP Agent.
Figure 5-8 Networking diagram of outputting alarms to the SNMP Agent
NM Station
Agent
10.1.1.2/24 10.1.1.1/24
GE1/0/1

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Enable the information center on the switch.
2. Specify the module enabled to output logs and configure the channel through which the
alarm is output.
3. Enable outputting alarm to the SNMP agent.
4. Enable transmitting alarms to the NM Station through SNMP.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Information channel number
l Module enabled to output alarms
l Severity levels of alarms
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the information center.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] info-center enable
Step 2 Specify the module enabled to output alarms and configure the channel used to output alarms.
# Specify the module enabled to output alarms and configure the channel used to output alarms.
[Quidway] info-center source ip channel channel7 trap level informational state on
NOTE
By default, alarms are output through the SNMP agent and information about all modules is displayed.
Step 3 Enable outputting alarms to the SNMP agent.
# Enable outputting alarms to the SNMP agent.
[Quidway] info-center snmp channel channel7
Step 4 Enable transmitting alarms to the NM Station through SNMP agent.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
92
# Start the SNMP agent and set the SNMP version to SNMPv2c.
[Quidway] snmp-agent sys-info version v2c
# Configure the alarm function.
[Quidway] snmp-agent trap enable
[Quidway] snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 params
securityname public
Step 5 Verify the configuration.
# View the channel used to output alarms to the SNMP agent.
[Quidway] display info-center
Information Center:enabled
SNMP Agent:
channel number : 7, channel name : channel7
# View the alarms output through the channel selected by SNMP agent.
[Quidway] display channel 7
channel number:7, channel name:channel7
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y debugging Y debugging N debugging
416a0000 IP Y debugging Y informational N debugging
# View the alarms output to the NM Station through SNMP agent.
[Quidway] display snmp-agent target-host
Target-host NO. 1
-----------------------------------------------------------
IP-address : 10.1.1.1
VPN instance : -
Security name : public
Port : 3000
Type : trap
Version : v1
Level : No authentication and privacy
NMS type : NMS
-----------------------------------------------------------
----End
Configuration Files
#
info-center source IP channel 7 trap level informational
info-center snmp channel 7
#
#
vlan 10
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
port hybrid pvid vlan 10
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
#
snmp-agent
snmp-agent local-engineid 000007DB7F00000100003598
snmp-agent community read public
snmp-agent sys-info version v2c v3
snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1 params securityname public
snmp-agent trap enable
#
return
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
93
5.7.6 Example for Outputting the Debugging Information to the
Console
After debugging messages are configured to be output to the console, when a fault occurs on the
device you can log in to the device through the console and run the debugging command to view
debugging messages.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 5-9, it is required to output the debugging information of the Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP) module to the Console.
Figure 5-9 Networking diagram of outputting information to the Console
Switch
Console
PC

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Enable the information center.
2. Set the logs to be output to the Console and the information module.
3. Configure the channel through which the debugging information is output.
4. Enable the terminal monitor function and display the debugging information.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Information channel number
l Module enabled to output the logs
l Information severity level
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the information center.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] info-center enable
Step 2 Allow the debugging on the ARP module to be output to the Console with the severity level of
the information as debugging.
[Quidway] info-center source arp channel console debug level debugging
[Quidway] info-center console channel console
[Quidway] quit
Step 3 Enable the terminal monitor function to display the debugging information.
<Quidway> terminal monitor
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
94
<Quidway> terminal debugging
Step 4 Enable ARP module debugging.
<Quidway> debugging arp packet
Step 5 Verify the configuration.
# View the configuration of the channel.
<Quidway> display channel 0
channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME ENABLE LOG_LEVEL ENABLE TRAP_LEVEL ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
ffff0000 default Y warning Y debugging Y debugging
810000 ARP Y warning Y debugging Y debugging
----End
Configuration Files
#
info-center source ARP channel 0
#
return
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 5 Information Center Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
95
6 Mirroring Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes basic concepts and configuration methods of port mirroring and traffic
mirroring.
6.1 Introduction to Mirroring
This section describes the basic concepts of port mirroring and traffic mirroring.
6.2 Mirroring Features Supported by the S9300
This section describes the mirroring features supported by the S9300.
6.3 Configuring Local Port Mirroring
This section describes how to configure local port mirroring.
6.4 Configuring Remote Port Mirroring
This section describes how to configure remote port mirroring.
6.5 Configuring Traffic Mirroring
This section describes how to configure traffic mirroring.
6.6 Configuration Examples
This section provides several configuration examples of port mirroring and traffic mirroring.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
96
6.1 Introduction to Mirroring
This section describes the basic concepts of port mirroring and traffic mirroring.
Mirroring refers to a process in which traffic is copied to a destination for analysis so that you
can detect and troubleshoot faults on a network. Mirroring is classified into port mirroring and
traffic mirroring. In port mirroring and traffic mirroring, observing ports and mirrored ports are
used.
l Observing port
An observing port is connected to a monitoring host. It is used to export the traffic copied
from a mirrored port or a traffic mirrored port.
l Mirrored port
A mirrored port is the interface to be observed. All the packets passing the mirroring
interface or the packets matching traffic classification rules are copied to the observing
port.
6.2 Mirroring Features Supported by the S9300
This section describes the mirroring features supported by the S9300.
Port Mirroring
For port mirroring, the S9300 copies the packets passing through a mirroring interface and then
sends the packets to a specified observing port for analysis and monitoring. During port
mirroring, all the packets passing through a mirroring interface are copied to an observing port.
See Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 Networking diagram of port mirroring
Observing
interface
Switch
Monitoring host
Interface
Flows of packets
Mirroring interface
Mirroing interface
Copied flows of packets

Port mirroring is classified into local port mirroring and remote port mirroring:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
97
l Local port mirroring
In local port mirroring, a monitoring host is directly connected to an observing port.
l Remote port mirroring
In remote port mirroring, a monitoring host is connected to the device where an observing
port is located over a Layer 2 or Layer 3 network.
Layer 2 port mirroring: The Remote Switched Port Analyzer (RSPAN) is used. If a
monitoring host is connected to the device where an observing port is located over a
Layer 2 network, the S9300 adds a VLAN tag to packets sent from a mirroring interface
and then broadcasts the packets in the VLAN through the observing port. After receiving
the packets, the remote device compares its VLAN ID with the VLAN ID of packets.
If the VLAN IDs are the same, the remote device forwards the packets to a remote
observing port.
Layer 3 port mirroring: The Encapsulated Remote SPAN (ERSPAN) is used. If a
monitoring host is connected to the device where an observing port is located over a
Layer 3 network, the S9300 adds a Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) header to
encapsulate and decapsulate mirroring packets. In this manner, the mirroring packets
can traverse the Layer 3 network.
NOTE
In local port mirroring and remote port mirroring, observing and mirroring interfaces are configured on
the same device.
You can configure eight observing ports on the S9300, but the traffic in a direction can be mirrored to only
one observing port.
A packet is copied from the mirroring interface to the observing port before its tag is removed; therefore,
packets sent from the observing port all contain tags.
The packets on the mirrored port are copied to the observing port; therefore, the observing port is considered
as the outbound interface of the packets. In this case, the discarded packets are not counted.
Flow Mirroring
For flow mirroring, the S9300 copies specified data passing through a flow mirroring interface
to a specified observing port or the CPU for analysis and monitoring. A flow mirroring interface
refers to the interface that a traffic policy containing flow mirroring behaviors is applied to. If
the packets passing through the flow mirroring interface match a traffic classifier in the traffic
policy on this interface, the packets are copied and sent to an observing port or the CPU. See
Figure 6-2.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
98
Figure 6-2 Networking diagram of flow mirroring
Observing
interface
Monitoring host
Interface
Classification of matching flows
Flows of copied packets
Flows of mirrored packets
Flows of packets
Flow
mirroring
interface
Flow
mirroring
interface

For flow mirroring, flows can be mirrored to an interface or the CPU:
l Flows mirrored to an interface indicate that the packets meeting requirements on the
interface enabled with flow mirroring are copied and then sent to an observing port for
analysis and diagnosis.
l Flows mirrored to the CPU indicate that the packets meeting requirements on the interface
enabled with flow mirroring are copied and then sent to the CPU for analysis and diagnosis.
Here, the CPU refers to the CPU of the Line Processing Unit (LPU) where the interface
enabled with flow mirroring is located.
Similar to port mirroring, flow mirroring is also classified into local flow mirroring and remote
flow mirroring. In remote flow mirroring, an observing port can also be connected to a
monitoring host over a Layer 2 or Layer 3 network.
Mirroring Specifications
The S9300 supports inter-board mirroring. That is, the observing port and mirrored port can be
on different LPUs of a switch.
On the S9300, the packets on multiple interfaces can be mirrored to one observing port.
Each board of the S9300 can be configured with up to three observing ports. Two of them are
used for upstream traffic and the other one is used for downstream traffic. The outgoing packets
of the same LPU can be mirrored to only one observing port.
On the S9300, the incoming packets on the same interface or the outgoing packets and incoming
packets on the same interface can be mirrored to different observing interfaces, but the packets
on the observing interfaces cannot be mirrored.
6.3 Configuring Local Port Mirroring
This section describes how to configure local port mirroring.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
99
6.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
To analyze or monitor the packets passing through an interface on the S9300, you can configure
local port mirroring when a monitoring device is directly connected to an observing port.
Pre-configuration Tasks
None
Data Preparation
To configure local port mirroring, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Type and number of the observing port
2 Mirrored port
3 Direction to which packets are mirrored

6.3.2 Configuring a Local Observing Port
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 where local port mirroring needs to be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
observe-port [ observe-port-index ] interface interface-type interface-number
A local observing port is configured.
observe-port-index specifies the index of an observing port. By default, the value is 1.
NOTE
You are not advertised to perform other configurations on an observing port; otherwise, the mirroring
function is affected.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
100
6.3.3 Configuring a Local Mirrored Port
Context
To configure an Eth-Trunk as a local mirrored port, you must run the interface eth-trunk trunk-
id command to create the Eth-Trunk first.
l If an Eth-Trunk is configured as a mirrored port, its member interfaces cannot be configured
as mirrored ports.
l If a member interface of an Eth-Trunk is configured as a mirrored port, the Eth-Trunk
cannot be configured as a mirrored port.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
port-mirroring to observe-port observe-port-index { inbound | outbound }
A local mirrored port is configured.
observe-port-index specifies the index of an observing port and must be the same as the index
of an observing port in 6.3.2 Configuring a Local Observing Port.
----End
6.3.4 Checking the Configuration
Prerequisite
The configurations of port mirroring are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display observe-port command to check the observing port in port mirroring.
l Run the display port-mirroring command to check the mirrored port in port mirroring.
----End
Result
Run the display port-mirroring command. If the names of the observing port and mirrored port
and the mirroring direction are displayed, it means that the configuration succeeds.
6.4 Configuring Remote Port Mirroring
This section describes how to configure remote port mirroring.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
101
6.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
To analyze or monitor the packets passing through an interface on the S9300, you can configure
remote port mirroring when a monitoring device is connected to an observing port over a Layer
2 or Layer 3 network.
Pre-configuration Tasks
l For layer 3 port mirroring: ensuring that routes are reachable on the network
l For layer 2 port mirroring: ensuring connectivity of the Layer 2 network
Data Preparation
To configure remote port mirroring, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Type and number of the observing port
2 Mirrored port
3 Direction to which packets are mirrored

6.4.2 Configuring a Remote Observing Port
Context
You can use remote port mirroring in the following modes:
l IP mode
In IP mode, the S9300 adds a GRE header to the packets to be mirrored so that the packets
can reach the remote monitoring device across a Layer 3 network. The destination IP
address of the remote monitoring device is specified by dest-ip-address.
l VLAN mode
In VLAN mode, the S9300 adds a specified VLAN tag to the packets to be mirrored so that
the packets can reach the remote monitoring device across a Layer 2 network.
Do as follows on the S9300 where remote port mirroring needs to be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run the following command as required.
l To configure remote port mirroring in IP mode, run:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
102
observe-port [ observe-port-index ] interface interface-type interface-number
destination-ip dest-ip-address source-ip source-ip-address [ dscp dscp-value |
vlan vlan-id ]
*
l To configure remote port mirroring in VLAN mode, run:
observe-port [ observe-port-index ] interface interface-type interface-number
vlan vlan-id
NOTE
Do not perform other configurations on an observing port; otherwise, the mirroring function is affected.
----End
6.4.3 Configuring a Remote Mirrored Port
Context
To configure an Eth-Trunk as a remote mirrored port, you must run the interface eth-trunk
trunk-id command to create the Eth-Trunk first.
l If an Eth-Trunk is configured as a mirrored port, its member interfaces cannot be configured
as mirrored ports.
l If a member interface of an Eth-Trunk is configured as a mirrored port, the Eth-Trunk
cannot be configured as a mirrored port.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
port-mirroring to observe-port observe-port-index { both | inbound | outbound }
A remote mirrored port is configured.
observe-port-index specifies the index of an observing port and must be the same as the index
of an observing port in 6.4.2 Configuring a Remote Observing Port.
----End
6.4.4 Checking the Configuration
Prerequisite
The configurations of port mirroring are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display observe-port command to check the observing port in port mirroring.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
103
l Run the display port-mirroring command to check the mirrored port in port mirroring.
----End
6.5 Configuring Traffic Mirroring
This section describes how to configure traffic mirroring.
6.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
To analyze or monitor the packets of the same attributes passing through an interface on the
S9300, you can configure traffic mirroring.
Pre-configuration Tasks
None
Data Preparation
To configure traffic mirroring, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Type and number of the observing port
2 Type and number of the traffic mirrored port
3 Names of the traffic classifier and traffic behavior and rules in the traffic classifier

6.5.2 Configuring an Observing Port
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 where traffic mirroring needs to be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run the following command to configure an observing port as required.
l If an observing port is directly connected to a monitoring device, run:
observe-port [ observe-port-index ] interface interface-type interface-number
l If the device where an observing port is located is connected to a monitoring device over a
Layer 2 network, run:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
104
observe-port [ observe-port-index ] interface interface-type interface-number
vlan vlan-id
l If the device where an observing port is located is connected to a monitoring device over a
Layer 3 network, run:
observe-port [ observe-port-index ] interface interface-type interface-number
destination-ip dest-ip-address source-ip source-ip-address [ dscp dscp-value |
vlan vlan-id ]
*
NOTE
You are not advised to perform other configurations on an observing port; otherwise, the mirroring function
is affected.
----End
6.5.3 Configuring Complex Traffic Classification
Select proper traffic classification rules and configure complex traffic classification as required.
For the configuration procedure, see Complex Traffic Classification Configurationin the
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch Configuration Guide - Device Management.
6.5.4 Creating a Traffic Behavior
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 where a traffic behavior needs to be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
traffic behavior behavior-name
A traffic behavior is created and the traffic behavior view is displayed.
Step 3 Run the following command as required.
l To mirror the traffic that matches rules in a traffic behavior to the CPU of the LPU, run:
mirroring to cpu
NOTE
After the traffic policy containing mirroring to cpu is used, the traffic matching the traffic
classification rules is forwarded to the CPU, which will degrade the CPU performance; therefore, use
the mirroring to cpu command with caution.
l To mirror the traffic that matches rules in a traffic behavior to a specified interface, run:
mirroring to observe-port observe-port-index
observe-port-index specifies the index of an observing port and must be the same as the index
of an observing port in 6.5.3 Configuring Complex Traffic Classification.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
105
6.5.5 Creating a Traffic Policy
Context
Do as follows on the S9300 where a traffic policy for traffic mirroring needs to be created.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
traffic policy policy-name
A traffic policy is created and the traffic policy view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
classifier classifier-name behavior behavior-name
A traffic classifier is bound to a traffic behavior in the traffic policy.
classifier-name specifies the name of a traffic classifier and must be the same as the name of a
traffic classifier in 6.5.3 Configuring Complex Traffic Classification; behavior-name
specifies the name of a traffic behavior and must be the same as the name of a traffic behavior
in 6.5.4 Creating a Traffic Behavior.
----End
6.5.6 Applying a Traffic Policy
A traffic policy containing a traffic mirroring action can be applied to an interface, a VLAN, or
the system.
Context
When a traffic policy contains a traffic mirroring action, it cannot be applied to outbound packets
destined for downstream devices in the system view or VLAN view. No error message is
displayed when you apply the traffic policy to outbound packets destined for downstream
devices, but the traffic policy is invalid for such packets.
Procedure
l Applying a traffic policy to an interface
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number [.subnumber ]
The mirrored interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
traffic-policy policy-name { inbound | outbound }
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
106
A traffic policy containing a traffic classifier and a traffic mirroring action is applied
to the interface.
l Applying a traffic policy to a VLAN
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
vlan vlan-id
The VLAN view is displayed.
3. Run:
traffic-policy policy-name inbound
A traffic policy containing a traffic classifier and a traffic mirroring action is applied
to the VLAN.
l Applying a traffic policy globally
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
traffic-policy policy-name global inbound [ slot slot-id ]
A traffic policy containing a traffic classifier and a traffic mirroring action is applied
globally.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
After the configuration, the packets that pass through this traffic mirrored port and match rules
in a traffic classifier are mirrored to a specified interface or the CPU of the LPU where this traffic
mirrored port is located.
NOTE
When a traffic policy is used in the outbound direction, the traffic policy takes effect for unicast and Layer
3 packets but does not take effect for Layer 2 broadcast and multicast packets.
6.5.7 Checking the Configuration
Prerequisite
The configurations of traffic mirroring are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display observe-port command to check the observing port in local port mirroring.
l Run the display port-mirroring command to check the mirrored port in local port
mirroring.
l Run the display traffic behavior user-defined [ behavior-name ] command to check the
configuration of the traffic behavior.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
107
l Run the display traffic classifier user-defined [ classifier-name ] command to check the
configuration of the traffic classifier.
l Run the display traffic policy user-defined [ policy-name [ classifier classifier-name ] ]
command to check the configuration of the traffic policy.
l Run the display traffic-policy policy-name applied-record command to check the
application of the traffic policy.
----End
6.6 Configuration Examples
This section provides several configuration examples of port mirroring and traffic mirroring.
6.6.1 Example for Configuring Local Port Mirroring
Networking Requirements
The R&D department and marketing department access the Switch through GE 1/0/1 and
GE1/0/2; a data detection device, that is, a server, is connected to GE 1/0/3 of the Switch. It is
required that the server should monitor received packets of the R&D department and marketing
department through local port mirroring. Figure 6-3 shows the networking diagram.
Figure 6-3 Networking diagram of local port mirroring configurations
R&D
department
Marketing
department
GE 1/0/1
GE 1/0/2
GE 1/0/3
Server
Switch
LSWA
LSWB
192.168.1.100

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure GE 1/0/3 as an observing port.
2. Configure GE 1/0/1 and GE 1/0/2 as mirrored ports.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
108
l Type and number of the observing port
l Type and number of the mirrored port
l Index number of the observing port, that is, 1
Procedure
Step 1 Configure each interface to ensure that the routes between hosts are reachable.
# Create VLANs 2, 3, and 4, and add GE 1/0/1, GE 1/0/2, and GE 1/0/3 to VLANs 2, 3, and 4
respectively.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname Switch
[Switch] vlan batch 2 to 4
[Switch] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port link-type trunk
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk pvid vlan 2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
[Switch] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port link-type trunk
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port trunk pvid vlan 3
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 3
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] quit
[Switch] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/3
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] port link-type trunk
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 3 4
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] quit
[Switch] interface vlanif 4
[Switch-Vlanif4] ip address 192.168.1.1 24
[Switch-Vlanif4] quit
Step 2 Configure a local observing port.
# Configure GE 1/0/3 on the Switch as a local observing port.
[Switch] observe-port 1 interface gigabitethernet1/0/3
Step 3 Configure local mirrored ports.
# Configure GE 1/0/1 on the Switch as a local mirrored port to monitor received packets of the
finance department.
[Switch] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port-mirroring to observe-port 1 inbound
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
# Configure GE 1/0/2 on the Switch as a local mirrored port to monitor received packets of the
purchase department.
[Switch] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port-mirroring to observe-port 1 inbound
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] quit
[Switch] quit
Step 4 Verify the configuration.
# Check the configuration of the observing port.
<Switch> display observe-port
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index : 1
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/3
Used : 2
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
109
# Check the configuration of mirrored ports.
<Switch> display port-mirroring
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Mirror-port Direction Observe-port
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Inbound GigabitEthernet1/0/3
2 GigabitEthernet1/0/2 Inbound GigabitEthernet1/0/3
----------------------------------------------------------------------
# Check the number of packets on GE 1/0/1, GE 1/0/2, and GE 1/0/3, and you can view that the
number of packets on GE1/0/3 is the sum of packets on GE 1/0/1 and GE 1/0/2. On the server,
you can view that all the packets received and sent on GE 1/0/1 and GE 1/0/2. This indicates
that packets on GE 1/0/1 and GE 1/0/2 are mirrored by the Switch.
<Switch> display interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Description:HUAWEI, Quidway Series, GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Interface
Switch Port,PVID : 2,The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 0022-0033-0044
Last physical up time : 2008-03-07 22:24:31 UTC-05:00
Last physical down time : 2008-03-07 22:22:22 UTC-05:00
Port Mode: COMMON FIBER
Speed : 1000, Loopback: NONE
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: ENABLE
Mdi : NORMAL
Last 300 seconds input rate 728 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 32 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 13608 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-03-07 22:24:32
Output peak rate 528 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-03-07 22:24:34
Input: 62754 packets, 8937914 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 62754
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Throttles: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0
Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0, Frames: 0
Output: 6816 packets, 477120 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 6816
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0
Input bandwidth utilization threshold : 100.00%
Output bandwidth utilization threshold: 100.00%
Input bandwidth utilization : 0.01%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0.00%
<Switch> display interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2
GigabitEthernet1/0/2 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Description:HUAWEI, Quidway Series, GigabitEthernet1/0/2 Interface
Switch Port,PVID : 3,The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 0022-0033-0044
Last physical up time : 2008-03-07 22:24:32 UTC-05:00
Last physical down time : 2008-03-07 22:22:22 UTC-05:00
Port Mode: COMMON FIBER
Speed : 1000, Loopback: NONE
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: ENABLE
Mdi : NORMAL
Last 300 seconds input rate 640 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 32 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 9480 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-03-07 22:24:33
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
110
Output peak rate 528 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-03-07 22:24:34
Input: 51924 packets, 7850076 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 51924
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Throttles: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0
Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0, Frames: 0
Output: 6817 packets, 477190 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 6817
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0
Input bandwidth utilization threshold : 100.00%
Output bandwidth utilization threshold: 100.00%
Input bandwidth utilization : 0.01%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0.00%
<Switch> display interface gigabitethernet 1/0/3
GigabitEthernet1/0/3 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Description:HUAWEI, Quidway Series, GigabitEthernet1/0/3 Interface
Switch Port,PVID : 4,The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 0022-0033-0044
Last physical up time : 2008-03-07 22:24:13 UTC-05:00
Last physical down time : 2008-03-07 22:22:22 UTC-05:00
Port Mode: COMMON FIBER
Speed : 1000, Loopback: NONE
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: ENABLE
Mdi : NORMAL
Last 300 seconds input rate 32 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 528 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-03-07 22:24:19
Output peak rate 0 bits/sec,Record time: -
Input: 114678 packets, 16787990 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 114678
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 114678, Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Throttles: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0
Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0, Frames: 0
Output: 0 packets, 0 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0
Input bandwidth utilization threshold : 100.00%
Output bandwidth utilization threshold: 100.00%
Input bandwidth utilization : 0.00%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0.00%
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of the Switch
#
sysname Switch
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
111
#
vlan batch 2 to 4
#
observe-port 1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/3
#
interface Vlanif4
ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
port link-type trunk
port trunk pvid vlan 2
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
port-mirroring to observe-port 1 inbound
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2
port link-type trunk
port trunk pvid vlan 3
port trunk allow-pass vlan 3
port-mirroring to observe-port 1 inbound
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/3
port link-type trunk
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 to 4
#
return
6.6.2 Example for Configuring Layer 2 Remote Port Mirroring
Networking Requirements
Users access the Internet through GigabitEthernet1/0/2 of SwitchA. SwitchA, SwitchB, and
SwitchC are connected through trunks. A monitoring server is connected to
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 of SwitchC. The server needs to monitor the packets received by users by
using remote port mirroring function.
Figure 6-4 Networking diagram of remote port mirroring configurations
GE1/0/1
Server
SwitchA
GE1/0/1
GE1/0/2
GE1/0/2
SwitchB
SwitchC
GE1/0/2 GE1/0/1
VLAN 2 VLAN 2
VLAN 3
Internet
User

Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
112
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure each interface to ensure that the routes between Layer 2 devices are reachable.
2. Configure GE 1/0/1 on Switch A as the remote observing port.
3. Configure GE 1/0/2 on Switch A as a mirrored port.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l ID of the VLAN to which packets are mirrored
l Index of the observing port
Procedure
Step 1 Configure each interface to ensure that the routes between Layer 2 devices are reachable.
# Configure Switch A.
<Quidway> system-view [Quidway] sysname SwitchA [SwitchA] vlan batch 2 to 3
[SwitchA-vlan1] quit [SwitchA] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 [SwitchA-
GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port link-type trunk [SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port
trunk pvid vlan 2 [SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
[SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit [SwitchA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2
[SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port link-type trunk [SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/2]
port trunk pvid vlan 3 [SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 3
[SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] quit
# Configure Switch B.
<Quidway> system-view [Quidway] sysname SwitchB [SwitchB] vlan 2 [SwitchB-vlan2]
quit [SwitchB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 [SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port
link-type trunk [SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk pvid vlan 2 [SwitchB-
GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 [SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]
quit [SwitchB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2 [SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port
link-type trunk [SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port trunk pvid vlan 2 [SwitchB-
GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 [SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/2]
quit
# Configure Switch C.
<Quidway> system-view [Quidway] sysname SwitchC [SwitchC] vlan 2 [SwitchC-vlan2]
quit [SwitchC] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 [SwitchC-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port
link-type trunk [SwitchC-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk pvid vlan 2 [SwitchC-
GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 [SwitchC-GigabitEthernet1/0/1]
quit [SwitchC] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2 [SwitchC-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port
link-type trunk [SwitchC-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port trunk pvid vlan 2 [SwitchC-
GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 [SwitchC-GigabitEthernet1/0/2]
quit
Step 2 Configure the remote observing port.
# Configure GE 1/0/1 on Switch A as the remote observing port.
[SwitchA] observe-port 1 interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1 vlan 2
Step 3 Configure the remote mirrored port.
# Configure GigabitEthernet1/0/2 of SwitchA as the remote observing port to monitor packets
received by users.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
113
[SwitchA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2 [SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port-
mirroring to observe-port 1 inbound [SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] quit [SwitchA]
quit
Step 4 Verify the configuration.
# Check the configuration of the observing port.
[SwitchA] display observe-port
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Index : 1
Interface: GigabitEthernet1/0/1
Used : 1
Vlan : 2
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Check the configuration of the mirrored port.
[SwitchA] display port-mirroring
---------------------------------------------------------------------- Mirror-
port Direction Observe-port
---------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
GigabitEthernet1/0/2 Inbound GigabitEthernet1/0/1
----------------------------------------------------------------------
# On the server, you can view that all the packets received on GE 1/0/2 of Switch A. This indicates
that packets on GE 1/0/2 are mirrored by Switch A.
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of Switch A
# sysname SwitchA # vlan batch 2 to 3
# observe-port 1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 vlan 2
# interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 port link-type trunk port trunk pvid vlan 2
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
# interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 port link-type trunk port trunk pvid vlan 3
port trunk allow-pass vlan 3
port-mirroring to observe-port 1 inbound
# return
l Configuration file of Switch B
# sysname SwitchB # vlan batch 2
# interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 port link-type trunk port trunk pvid vlan 2
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
# interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 port link-type trunk port trunk pvid vlan 2
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
# return
l Configuration file of Switch C
# sysname SwitchC # vlan batch 2
# interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1 port link-type trunk port trunk pvid vlan 2
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
# interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2 port link-type trunk port trunk pvid vlan 2
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
# return
6.6.3 Example for Configuring Traffic Mirroring
Networking Requirements
The R&D department and marketing department are connected to GE 1/0/1 and GE1/0/2 of the
Switch through LSWA and LSWB. It is required that the Switch should monitor the packets
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
114
with the 802.1p priority as 6 and the outgoing interface as GE 1/0/3 of the R&D department and
marketing department through local port mirroring. See Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 Networking diagram of traffic mirroring configurations
R&D
department
Marketing
department
GE 1/0/1
GE 1/0/2
GE 1/0/3
Server
Switch
LSWA
LSWB
192.168.1.100

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Create a VLAN on the Switch and add GE 1/0/1, GE 1/0/2, and GE 1/0/3 to the VLAN.
2. Configure GE 1/0/3 as an observing port.
3. Create a traffic classifier and set the traffic classification rule of matching the packets with
the 802.1p priority as 6.
4. Create a traffic behavior and configure traffic mirroring actions in the traffic behavior.
5. Create a traffic policy to bind the traffic classifier and traffic behavior.
6. Apply the traffic policy on GE 1/0/1 and GE 1/0/2.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Name of the traffic classifier, that is, c1
l Name of the traffic behavior, that is, b1
l Name of the traffic policy, that is, p1
l ID of the VLAN, that is, 2
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the interface and VLAN.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname Switch
[Switch] vlan 2
[Switch-vlan2] quit
[Switch] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port link-type trunk
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk pvid vlan 2
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
115
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
[Switch] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port link-type trunk
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port trunk pvid vlan 2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] quit
[Switch] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] port link-type trunk
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] port trunk pvid vlan 2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/3] quit
Step 2 Configure an observing port.
# Configure GE 1/0/3 on the Switch as an observing port.
[Switch] observe-port 1 interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/3
Step 3 Create a traffic classifier.
# Create traffic classifier c1 on the Switch and set the traffic classification rule of matching the
packets with the 802.1p priority as 6.
[Switch] traffic classifier c1
[Switch-classifier-c1] if-match 8021p 6
[Switch-classifier-c1] quit
Step 4 Create a traffic behavior.
# Create traffic behavior b1 on the Switch and configure traffic mirroring actions.
[Switch] traffic behavior b1
[Switch-behavior-b1] mirroring to observe-port 1
[Switch-behavior-b1] quit
Step 5 Create a traffic policy and apply it to an interface.
# Create traffic policy p1 on the Switch to bind the traffic classifier and traffic behavior, and
apply the traffic policy to GE 1/0/1 and GE 1/0/2 in the inbound direction to monitor the packets
of the R&D department and marketing department.
[Switch] traffic policy p1
[Switch-trafficpolicy-p1] classifier c1 behavior b1
[Switch-trafficpolicy-p1] quit
[Switch] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/1
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] traffic-policy p1 inbound
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
[Switch] interface GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] traffic-policy p1 inbound
[Switch-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] quit
[Switch] quit
Step 6 Verify the configuration.
# Check the configuration of the traffic classifier.
<Switch> display traffic classifier user-defined c1
User Defined Classifier Information:
Classifier: c1
Precedence: 5
Operator: OR
Rule(s) : if-match 8021p 6
# Check the configuration of the traffic policy.
<Switch> display traffic policy user-defined p1
User Defined Traffic Policy Information:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
116
Policy: p1
Classifier: default-class
Behavior: be
-none-
Classifier: c1
Behavior: b1
mirroring to observe-port 1
# Check the number of packets forwarded by the Switch on GE 1/0/1, GE 1/0/2, and GE 1/0/3,
or check all the packets received from and sent to GE 1/0/1 and GE 1/0/2 on the server. This
indicates that packets on GE 1/0/1 and GE 1/0/2 are mirrored by the Switch.
<Switch> display interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Description:HUAWEI, Quidway Series, GigabitEthernet1/0/1 Interface
Switch Port,PVID : 2,The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 0022-0033-0044
Last physical up time : 2008-03-07 22:24:31 UTC-05:00
Last physical down time : 2008-03-07 22:22:22 UTC-05:00
Port Mode: COMMON FIBER
Speed : 1000, Loopback: NONE
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: ENABLE
Mdi : NORMAL
Last 300 seconds input rate 728 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 32 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 13608 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-03-07 22:24:32
Output peak rate 528 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-03-07 22:24:34
Input: 62754 packets, 8937914 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 62754
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Throttles: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0
Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0, Frames: 0
Output: 6816 packets, 477120 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 6816
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0
Input bandwidth utilization threshold : 100.00%
Output bandwidth utilization threshold: 100.00%
Input bandwidth utilization : 0.01%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0.00%
<Switch> display interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2
GigabitEthernet1/0/2 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Description:HUAWEI, Quidway Series, GigabitEthernet1/0/2 Interface
Switch Port,PVID : 2,The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 0022-0033-0044
Last physical up time : 2008-03-07 22:24:32 UTC-05:00
Last physical down time : 2008-03-07 22:22:22 UTC-05:00
Port Mode: COMMON FIBER
Speed : 1000, Loopback: NONE
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: ENABLE
Mdi : NORMAL
Last 300 seconds input rate 640 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 32 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 9480 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-03-07 22:24:33
Output peak rate 528 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-03-07 22:24:34
Input: 51924 packets, 7850076 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 51924
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
117
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Throttles: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0
Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0, Frames: 0
Output: 6817 packets, 477190 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 6817
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0
Input bandwidth utilization threshold : 100.00%
Output bandwidth utilization threshold: 100.00%
Input bandwidth utilization : 0.01%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0.00%
<Switch> display interface gigabitethernet 1/0/3
GigabitEthernet1/0/3 current state : UP
Line protocol current state : UP
Description:HUAWEI, Quidway Series, GigabitEthernet1/0/3 Interface
Switch Port,PVID : 2,The Maximum Frame Length is 9216
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is 0022-0033-0044
Last physical up time : 2008-03-07 22:24:13 UTC-05:00
Last physical down time : 2008-03-07 22:22:22 UTC-05:00
Port Mode: COMMON FIBER
Speed : 1000, Loopback: NONE
Duplex: FULL, Negotiation: ENABLE
Mdi : NORMAL
Last 300 seconds input rate 32 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Last 300 seconds output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec
Input peak rate 528 bits/sec,Record time: 2008-03-07 22:24:19
Output peak rate 0 bits/sec,Record time: -
Input: 114678 packets, 16787990 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 114678
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
CRC: 0, Giants: 0
Jabbers: 0, Throttles: 0
Runts: 0, DropEvents: 0
Alignments: 0, Symbols: 0
Ignoreds: 0, Frames: 0
Output: 0 packets, 0 bytes
Unicast: 0, Multicast: 0
Broadcast: 0, Jumbo: 0
Discard: 0, Total Error: 0
Collisions: 0, ExcessiveCollisions: 0
Late Collisions: 0, Deferreds: 0
Buffers Purged: 0
Input bandwidth utilization threshold : 100.00%
Output bandwidth utilization threshold: 100.00%
Input bandwidth utilization : 0.00%
Output bandwidth utilization : 0.00%
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of the Switch
#
sysname Switch
#
vlan batch 2
#
observe-port 1 interface GigabitEthernet1/0/3
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
118
#
traffic classifier c1
if-match 8021p 6
#
traffic behavior b1
mirroring to observe-port 1
#
traffic policy p1
classifier c1 behavior b1
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
port link-type trunk
port trunk pvid vlan 2
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
traffic-policy p1 inbound
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2
port link-type trunk
port trunk pvid vlan 2
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
traffic-policy p1 inbound
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/3
port link-type trunk
port trunk pvid vlan 2
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
#
return
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 6 Mirroring Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
119
7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to power the remote devices through the power over Ethernet (PoE)
function.
7.1 PoE Overview
This section describes the concept and working principle of PoE.
7.2 PoE Features Supported by the S9300
This section describes the PoE features supported by the S9300.
7.3 Configuring PoE Functions
This section describes how to configure PoE functions.
7.4 Configuration Examples
This section provides an example of PoE power supply.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
120
7.1 PoE Overview
This section describes the concept and working principle of PoE.
The S9300 supports power over Ethernet (PoE). It can provide power for powered devices (PDs)
through twisted pairs after configured with PoE power supplies and PoE boards.
7.2 PoE Features Supported by the S9300
This section describes the PoE features supported by the S9300.
PoE Functions Provided by the S9300
l The PoE power supply is independent of the system power supply.
l The PoE power supplies of the S9300 are managed by the main control board. Each PoE
board can be regarded as the power sourcing equipment (PSE), and a PoE board provides
power for all the ports on the board independently.
l The S9300 complies with the legacy power supply standard, and it can also provide power
for PDs that do not comply with the legacy standard.
l The S9300 can provide power and transmit data at the same time through the signal lines
1, 3, 2, and 6 of the category-3 or category-5 twisted pair. If the PD can obtain power only
through the idle lines 4, 5, 7, and 8 of the twisted pair, the S9300 can provide power through
a converter.
l The S9300 provides power for devices through Ethernet electrical interfaces on the LPUs.
An LPU can provide power for a maximum of 48 devices at a distance of up to 100 m.
l The maximum PoE power of an Electrical interface is 30 W.
NOTE
l When the S9300 provides power for a PD, the PD can work without other external power supplies.
l If a PD has an external power supply, the S9300 and the external power supply of the PD work in
redundancy mode.
PoE Power Supplies Supported by the S9300
The S9300 can use the AC PoE power supply.
The maximum output power of a 220 V AC PoE power supply is 800 W, and the maximum
output power of a 110 V AC PoE power supply is 400 W.
NOTE
The maximum output power of the system is determined by the number, type, and voltage of PoE power
supplies.
PoE Boards Supported by the S9300
Currently, the S9300 supports only one type of PoE board, that is, G48VA.
7.3 Configuring PoE Functions
This section describes how to configure PoE functions.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
121
7.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring PoE, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the pre-
configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you complete the configuration task
quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
The S9300 can detect whether a device connected to it needs the power supply and provide
power for the device that requires the power supply.
According to the actual requirements on the network, you can perform the following operations
by using commands:
l Set the maximum output power, power supply management mode, and reserved power of
a board.
l Configure a board to allow high inrush current during power-on.
l Set the backup mode of the PoE power supplies. Currently, the S9300 supports three backup
modes: 3+1, 2+2, and 4+0.
l Set the alarm threshold of the power consumption percentage.
l Enable the PoE function on an interface.
l Set the maximum output power and power supply priority of an interface.
l Power on and power off a PD on an interface.
l Set the power-off time range of a PoE interface.
l Configure a PSE to check the compatibility of PDs.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the PoE function, complete the following task:
Installing the PoE power supply and PoE board on the S9300
7.3.2 Configuring the PoE Function Globally
In the system view, you can set the maximum output power of a board, set the PoE power supply
management mode, configure a board to allow high inrush current during power-on, set the
percentage of the reserved PoE power against the total PoE power, set the backup mode of the
PoE power supplies, and set the alarm threshold of power consumption percentage.
Procedure
l Optional: Setting the maximum output power of a board
NOTE
The maximum output power of a board that you can set depends on the number of PoE power supplies
and the capability of the PoE power supplies.
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
poe max-power slot_max_power slot slot-id
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
122
The maximum output power of a board is set.
The value of slot_max_power ranges from 0 to the maximum output power of the PoE
power supplies in the system. The unit is mW.
By default, the maximum output power of a PoE board depends on the power of the
PoE power supply provided by the system.
l Optional: Setting the PoE power supply management mode
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
poe power-management { auto | manual } slot slot-id
The PoE power supply management mode of the board in the specified slot is set.
By default, the S9300 uses the automatic power management mode.
l Optional: Configuring a board to allow high inrush current during power-on
If a PD does not comply with IEEE 802.3at or 802.3af, high inrush current is generated
when the PD is powered on. In this case, the PSE cuts off the power of the PD to protect
itself. If the PSE is required to provide power for the PD, the PSE must allow high inrush
current.
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
poe high-inrush enable slot slot-id
A PoE board is configured to allow high inrush current during power-on.
By default, a board does not allow high inrush power during power-on.
l Optional: Setting the percentage of the reserved PoE power against the total PoE power
The S9300 can dynamically allocate power to each interface according to the power
consumption of each interface. The power consumption of a PD keeps changing when the
PD is running. The S9300 periodically calculates the total power consumption of all the
PDs connected to boards. If the total power consumption exceeds the upper threshold of
the board, the S9300 cuts off the power of the PDs on the interfaces of low priority to ensure
that other PDs can run normally.
Sometimes, the power consumption increases sharply and the available power of a board
or the entire equipment cannot support the burst increase of power. At this time, the software
system has not found that the total power consumption exceeded the upper threshold;
therefore, the S9300 does not power off interfaces of low priority in time. As a result, the
PoE power supply is shut down for overload protection, and hence all PDs are powered
off.
This problem can be solved by setting proper reserved power. When the power consumption
increases sharply, the reserved power can support the system running. Then the system
software has time to power off interfaces of low priority to ensure stable running of other
PDs.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
123
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
poe power-reserved power-reserved
The percentage of the reserved PoE power against the total PoE power is set.
By default, 20% of the total PoE power is reserved.
l Optional: Setting the backup mode of the PoE power supplies
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
poe-power backup-mode using-power-num
The backup mode of the PoE power supplies used by the board in a slot is set.
NOTE
By default, the backup mode of the S9306 or S9312 PoE power supplies is 4+0, and the
S9303 PoE power supplies is 1+0.
l Optional: Setting the alarm threshold of power consumption percentage
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
poe-power utilization-threshold thresholdvalue
The alarm threshold of power consumption percentage is set.
The value range of thresholdvalue in the poe-power utilization-threshold depends
on the reserved power. If the reserved power is set to 25% of the total PoE power by
using the poe power-reserved command, the value of thresholdvalue ranges from
75% to 99%. By default, the alarm threshold is 90%. That is, an alarm is generated
when the consumed power accounts for 90% of the total power.
----End
7.3.3 Configuring the PoE Function on an Interface
In the interface view, you can enable the PoE function on an interface, set the maximum output
power of an interface, set the power supply priority of an interface, manually power on or power
off the PD connected to an interface, enable an interface to check compatibility of PD, and set
the power-off time range of a PoE interface.
Procedure
l Enabling the PoE function on an interface
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
124
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
poe enable
The PoE function is enabled. By default, the PoE function is enabled on all interfaces.
l (Optional) Setting the maximum output power of an interface
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
poe power port_max_power
The maximum output power of the interface is set.
The unit of port_max_power is mW.
NOTE
l By default, the maximum output power of an interface is 37 W.
l The maximum output power of a board is not equal to the maximum output power of an
interface multiplied by the number of interfaces on the board because not all interfaces on
the board can provide maximum output power at the same time.
l (Optional) Setting the power supply priority of an interface
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
poe priority { critical | high | low }
The power supply priority of the interface is set.
By default, the power supply priority of an interface is low.
The priorities in descending order are critical, high, and low.
l (Optional) Manually powering on or powering off the PD connected to an interface
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. (Optional) Run:
poe { power-on | power-off } interface interface-type interface-number
The PD connected to an interface is powered on or powered off manually.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
125
NOTE
When the manual power management mode is adopted, you must manually power on or power
off PDs on interfaces.
l Optional: Setting the power-off time range of a PoE interface
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
time-range time-name { start-time to end-time days | from time1 date1
[ to time2 date2 ] }
The power-off time range of a PoE interface is set.
3. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
4. Run:
poe power-off time-range time-name
The power-off time range takes effect on the interface.
l Optional: Enabling an interface to check compatibility of PDs
NOTE
Before enabling an interface to check compatibility of PDs, you must enable PoE on the PSE. After
this function is enabled, the interface can detect the PDs that do not comply with IEEE 802.3af or
802.3at.
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
poe legacy enable
The interface is enabled to check compatibility of PDs.
By default, an interface does not check compatibility of PDs.
----End
7.3.4 Checking the Configuration
After the PoE configurations are complete, you can view the PoE power status, device
information, and PoE configuration on an interface.
Prerequisite
The PoE power supply and PoE board are installed, and the PoE function is configured.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
126
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display poe-power command to view the status of the PoE power supply.
Step 2 Run the display poe device command to view information about the devices that support the
PoE function.
Step 3 Run the display poe information command to view the PoE information.
Step 4 Run the display poe power interface interface-type interface-number command to view the
output power of an interface.
Step 5 Run the display poe power slot slot-id command to view the output power of the interfaces on
the board in the specified slot.
Step 6 Run the display poe power-state interface interface-type interface-number command to view
the status of PoE power supply on an interface.
Step 7 Run the display poe power-state slot slot-id command to view the status of PoE power supply
on the board in the specified slot.
----End
7.4 Configuration Examples
This section provides an example of PoE power supply.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 7-1, the requirements as follows:
l PoE boards are installed in slot 1 and slot 2 of the S9306, and the PoE power supply is
installed.
l IP phones are connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/1 and GigabitEthernet 2/0/1.
l Other PDs are connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 and GigabitEthernet 2/0/2.
l The PD connected to GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 has a high priority in power supply.
l The maximum output power of the PoE board in slot 1 is 200 W.
l The PD connected to GigabitEthernet 2/0/2 requires the input power of no more than 20
mW.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
127
Figure 7-1 Networking diagram of the PoE application
GE 1/0/1 GE 1/0/2
GE 2/0/1 GE 2/0/2
IP Phone
PD
PD IP Phone

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. In the system view, set the maximum output power of the PoE board in slot 1.
2. In the interface view, set the power supply priority of GigabitEthernet 1/0/2.
3. In the interface view, set the maximum output power of GigabitEthernet 2/0/2.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Power supply priority of GigabitEthernet 1/0/2
l Maximum output power of the PoE board in slot 1
l Maximum output power of GigabitEthernet 2/0/2
Procedure
Step 1 In the system view, set the maximum output power of the PoE board in slot 1.
# Set the maximum output power of the PoE board in slot 1 to 200 W.
NOTE
On the S9300, the unit of the output power is mW.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] poe max-power 200000 slot 1
Step 2 Set the maximum output power of GigabitEthernet 2/0/2.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet 2/0/2
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet2/0/2] poe power 20
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet2/0/2] quit
[Quidway]
Step 3 Set the power supply priority of GigabitEthernet 1/0/2 to critical.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
128
[Quidway] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/2
[Quidway-GigabitEthernet1/0/2] poe priority critical
Step 4 Verify the configuration.
# Display the PoE power supply status of the LPU in slot 1.
[Quidway] display poe power-state slot 1
PortName PowerOn/Off Enabled Priority Status
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/0 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/1 on enable Low Power condition is good
GigabitEthernet1/0/2 on enable Critical Power condition is good
GigabitEthernet1/0/3 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/4 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/5 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/6 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/7 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/8 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/9 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/10 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/11 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/12 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/13 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/14 on enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/15 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/16 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/17 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/18 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/19 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/20 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/21 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/22 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/23 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/24 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/25 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/26 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/27 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/28 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/29 off enable Low no current PD connect
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
129
GigabitEthernet1/0/30 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/31 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/32 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/33 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/34 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/35 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/36 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/37 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/38 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/39 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/40 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/41 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/42 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/43 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/44 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/45 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/46 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet1/0/47 off enable Low no current PD connect
# Display the PoE power supply status of the LPU in slot 2.
[Quidway] display poe power-state slot 2
PortName PowerOn/Off Enabled Priority Status
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet2/0/0 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/1 on enable Low Power condition is good
GigabitEthernet2/0/2 on enable Low Power condition is good
GigabitEthernet2/0/3 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/4 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/5 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/6 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/7 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/8 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/9 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/10 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/11 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/12 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/13 off enable Low no current PD connect
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
130
GigabitEthernet2/0/14 on enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/15 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/16 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/17 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/18 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/19 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/20 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/21 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/22 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/23 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/24 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/25 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/26 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/27 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/28 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/29 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/30 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/31 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/32 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/33 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/34 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/35 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/36 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/37 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/38 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/39 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/40 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/41 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/42 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/43 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/44 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/45 off enable Low no current PD connect
GigabitEthernet2/0/46 off enable Low no current PD connect
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
131
GigabitEthernet2/0/47 off enable Low no current PD connect
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
poe max-power 200000 slot 1
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/2
poe priority critical
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/2
poe power 20
#
return
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 7 PoE Power Supply Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
132
8 ALS Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) configuration on the S9300.
8.1 ALS Overview
The ALS mechanism controls the pulse of the laser of an optical module by detecting the Loss
of Signal (LOS) on an optical interface.
8.2 ALS Features Supported by the S9300
This section describes the ALS features supported by the S9300.
8.3 Configuring ALS
Configuring ALS of the laser of an optical module in the interface view provides security
protection and saves energy.
8.4 Configuration Examples
This section provides a configuration example of ALS.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 8 ALS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
133
8.1 ALS Overview
The ALS mechanism controls the pulse of the laser of an optical module by detecting the Loss
of Signal (LOS) on an optical interface.
When ALS is disabled, if the fiber link is faulty, the optical interface is not disabled and the laser
of an optical module is enabled though data communication is interrupted. If the laser of an
optical module still sends pulses after data communication is interrupted, energy is wasted and
eyes of operators may be hurt.
When ALS is enabled, if the fiber link is faulty, the software automatically disables the laser of
an optical module from sending pulses on the optical interface after detecting the LOS on the
optical interface. When the faulty fiber link is recovered, the software detects that the LOS of
the optical interface is cleared. Then the software enables the laser to send pulses. The ALS
mechanism protects operators against laser injury and saves energy.
8.2 ALS Features Supported by the S9300
This section describes the ALS features supported by the S9300.
Applicable Environment of ALS
l The switches are connected through fibers.
When switches are connected through fibers, the ALS function can be enabled on interfaces
of switches to protect users against laser radiation to eyes, as shown in Figure 8-1.
Figure 8-1 Connecting switches through fibers
SwitchA SwitchB
TX RX
RX TX
l The switch and the optical network terminal (ONT) are connected through fibers.
In the application of fiber to the home (FTTH), if ONT users perform improper operations
on the fiber because of lack of knowledge about radiation or children touch the fiber, the
radiation of the laser harms eyes. To solve this problem, you can enable the ALS function
on the switch to protect safety of users. Figure 8-2 shows the connection.
Figure 8-2 Connecting the switch and ONT through the fiber
TX
TX RX
RX
Switch ONT
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 8 ALS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
134
Influence of the ALS Function on Link Data Communication Recovery
When ALS is disabled, the optical module laser of the switch is still working. After the fiber
link is recovered, the LOS is cleared and the interface becomes Up rapidly. When ALS is enabled,
the switch controls the laser by detecting the LOS on the interface. This delays the recovery of
data communication on the link.
l ALS is enabled on both ends of the fiber link.
As shown in Figure 8-1, two switches are connected through the fiber. The interfaces of
the two switches are enabled with ALS and work in automatic restart mode. After the fiber
link is recovered, the process for interfaces of Switch A and Switch B changing from Down
to Up is as follows:
1. Switch A sends pulses periodically.
2. Switch B receives pulses of Switch A after the fiber link is recovered.
3. The LOS on the interface of Switch B is cleared, and the interface becomes Up and
sends signals.
4. Switch A receives signals of Switch B.
5. The LOS on the interface of Switch A is cleared, the interface becomes Up, and data
communication is recovered.
l ALS is enabled on one end of the fiber link.
As shown in Figure 8-1, two switches are connected through the fiber. ALS is disabled on
the interface of Switch A and enabled on the interface of Switch B, and the interface work
in automatic restart mode. After the fiber link is recovered, the process for interfaces of
Switch A and Switch B changing from Down to Up is as follows:
1. The optical module laser of Switch A is still working.
2. Switch B receives optical signals of Switch A immediately after the fiber link is
recovered.
3. The LOS on the interface of Switch B is cleared, and the interface becomes Up and
sends signals.
4. Switch A receives signals of Switch B.
5. The LOS on the interface of Switch A is cleared, the interface becomes Up, and data
communication is recovered.
After ALS is enabled on an interface, the communication recovery speed on the interface is
reduced. Packets are discarded if traffic is transmitted on the interface.
8.3 Configuring ALS
Configuring ALS of the laser of an optical module in the interface view provides security
protection and saves energy.
8.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring ALS, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the
pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you complete the configuration
task quickly and accurately.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 8 ALS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
135
Applicable Environment
The S9300 detects LOSs on optical interfaces to control the laser of optical modules, ensuring
security and saving energy.
According to the actual networking requirements, after ALS is enabled, you can:
l Set the restart mode of the laser of an optical module through a command.
l Set the ALS pulse interval and width of the laser of an optical module through commands.
l View the ALS configuration on interfaces of different optical modules through commands.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring ALS, complete the following task:
Ensuring that boards supporting optical interfaces exist on the S9300
Data Preparation
To configure ALS, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 ALS pulse interval of the laser
ALS pulse width of the laser

8.3.2 Enabling ALS on an Interface
The ALS configuration takes effect only after ALS is enabled on an interface.
Context
The constraints on ALS are as follows:
l Only optical interfaces support ALS. Electrical interfaces do not support ALS.
When optical interfaces transmit services unidirectionally, they do not support ALS.
The hardware must provide support for the software to detect the LOS on an optical
interface and control the laser on an interface.
l The link aggregation group does not support ALS.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 8 ALS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
136
Step 3 Run:
als enable
ALS is enabled on the interface.
By default, ALS is disabled on an interface.
----End
8.3.3 (Optional) Setting the Restart Mode of the Laser
The laser can work in automatic restart mode or manual restart mode. By default, the laser works
in automatic restart mode.
Prerequisite
ALS is enabled on the interface.
Context
If the laser of an optical module works in automatic restart mode, the laser starts automatically
at ALS pulse intervals. If the laser of an optical module is set to work in manual restart mode,
you must start the laser manually. Then the laser sends a pulse.
If the fiber link recovery is detected in time, you can use the manual restart mode so that the
laser can send pulses immediately. Therefore, data communication can be recovered rapidly.
By default, the laser works in automatic restart mode after ALS is enabled on all the interfaces.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
als restart mode manual
The restart mode of the laser is set to manual.
The ALS pulse width of the interface in manual restart mode is the same as that in automatic
restart mode.
----End
8.3.4 (Optional) Starting the Laser Manually
When the laser works in automatic restart mode, you need to manually open the laser so that the
laser sends one pulse.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 8 ALS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
137
Prerequisite
The interface is enabled with ALS and works in manual restart mode.
Context
When an interface detects the LOS, the laser of the optical module stops sending pulses. If the
als restart command is not used, the laser will not be restarted. If the interface still detects the
LOS after the laser is started manually, the laser is stopped again. If the interface detects that
the LOS is cleared, the laser of an optical module sends pulses and data communication is
recovered.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
als restart
The laser of an optical module is started manually. Then the laser sends a pulse.
----End
8.3.5 (Optional) Setting the ALS Pulse Interval and Width of the
Laser
You can set the proper laser pulse interval and width to ensure energy conservation and emission
deduction and timely detection of fiber link recovery.
Prerequisite
The interface is enabled with ALS and works in automatic restart mode.
Context
The ALS pulse width refers to the duration in which a laser sends pulses; the ALS pulse interval
refers to the period between rising edges of pulses. A smaller pulse width and a greater pulse
interval save more energy but reduce the speed of fiber link recovery.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 8 ALS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
138
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
als restart pulse-interval pulse-interval
The ALS pulse interval of the laser on the interface is set.
By default, the ALS pulse interval is 100s.
Step 4 Run:
als restart pulse-width pulse-width
The ALS pulse width of the laser on the interface is set.
By default, the ALS pulse width is 2s.
----End
8.3.6 Checking the Configuration
After ALS is configured, you can the ALS configuration on a specified interface or in a specified
slot, including the ALS status, laser status, ALS restart mode, and ALS pulse interval and width.
Prerequisite
The ALS configurations are complete on the S9300.
Procedure
l Run the display als configuration slot slot-id command to check the ALS configuration
in the specified slot.
l Run the display als configuration interface interface-type interface-number command to
check the ALS configuration on the specified interface.
----End
8.4 Configuration Examples
This section provides a configuration example of ALS.
8.4.1 Example for Configuring ALS
Through the ALS function, a laser can automatically stop sending pulses when a link is faulty
and recover pulse transmission after the link is recovered.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 8-3, the LPUs that support ALS are installed in slot 1 of Switch A and
Switch B, GE 1/0/0 of Switch A and Switch B are connected through a fiber.
When data transmission is interrupted by faults occurred on the fiber link, if the laser of the
optical module sends pulses continuously, the energy is wasted and potential risks are caused.
After ALS is enabled on both interfaces of the fiber link, the laser stops sending pulses if a fault
occurs on the fiber link. If the faulty link is recovered, the laser starts to send pulses.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 8 ALS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
139
Figure 8-3 ALS application
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
SwitchA SwitchB

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Enable ALS on GE 1/0/0 on Switch A and Switch B.
2. Configure the lasers of GE 1/0/0 on Switch A and Switch B to work in automatic restart
mode.
3. Set the ALS pulse intervals and widths of the lasers of GE 1/0/0 on Switch A and Switch
B.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l ALS pulse interval and width of the laser of the optical module on GE 1/0/0 of Switch A
l ALS pulse interval and width of the laser of the optical module on GE 1/0/0 of Switch B
Procedure
Step 1 Enable ALS on GE 1/0/0 of Switch A, configure the laser of the interface to work in automatic
restart mode, and set the ALS pulse interval and width to 200s and 3s.
# Enable ALS.
<SwitchA> system-view
[SwitchA] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] als enable
# Set the ALS pulse interval and width of the laser.
[SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] undo als restart mode manual
[SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] als restart pulse-interval 200
[SwitchA-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] als restart pulse-width 3
Step 2 Enable ALS on GE 1/0/0 of Switch B, configure the laser of the interface to work in automatic
restart mode, and set the ALS pulse interval and width to 200s and 3s.
# Enable ALS.
<SwitchB> system-view
[SwitchB] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] als enable
# Set the ALS pulse interval and width of the laser.
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] undo als restart mode manual
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] als restart pulse-interval 200
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] als restart pulse-width 3
Step 3 Verify the configuration.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 8 ALS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
140
# Run the display als configuration interface interface-type interface-number command on
Switch A and Switch B to view the ALS configuration.
<SwitchA> display als configuration interface gigabitethernet1/0/0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interface ALS Laser Restart Interval(s) Width(s)
Status Status Mode
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/0 Enable Off Auto 200 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<SwitchB> display als configuration interface gigabitethernet1/0/0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interface ALS Laser Restart Interval(s) Width(s)
Status Status Mode
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/0 Enable Off Auto 200 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of Switch A
#
sysname SwitchA
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
als enable
als restart pulse-interval 200
als restart pulse-width 3
#
return
l Configuration file of Switch B
#
sysname SwitchB
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
als enable
als restart pulse-interval 200
als restart pulse-width 3
#
return
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 8 ALS Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
141
9 Rebooting
About This Chapter
This chapter describes how to reboot the S9300.
9.1 Process of Booting the S9300
This section describes the process of booting the S9300.
9.2 Process of Booting the BootROM
The section describes the process of booting the bootrom.
9.3 Process of Booting the System Software
The section describes the process of booting the system software.
9.4 Rebooting the S9300
This section describes how to reboot the S9300.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 9 Rebooting
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
142
9.1 Process of Booting the S9300
This section describes the process of booting the S9300.
The software running on the S9300 includes the BootROM software and system software. The
BootROM software is classified into the basic BootROM and the BootLoad. After the S9300 is
powered on, the basic BootROM starts to run and then boots the BootLoad. Then, the BootLoad
boots the system software. Figure 9-1 shows this process.
Figure 9-1 Process of booting the S9300
Press
Ctrl+A
Run basic
BootROM
Start
Run BootLoad
Yes
No
Press
Ctrl+B
Yes
No
Run system
software
End
Enter the Basic
BootROM menu
Upgrade basic BootROM
Enter the BootLoad
menu
Upgrade system
software
Quit the Basic
BootROM menu
Quit the BootLoad menu
Enter the CLI
Upgrade BootLoad

Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 9 Rebooting
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
143
9.2 Process of Booting the BootROM
The section describes the process of booting the bootrom.
Process of Booting the BasicBootROM Software
After the S9300 is powered on, the basic BootROM starts to run, and the hardware of the
S9300 performs self-check. The terminal displays the following message:
*************************************************************
* Copyright (c) 2007-2010 HUAWEI TECH CO., LTD. *
*************************************************************
Boardname ..................................................................SRU
Start L2 Cache Test ? ('t' is test):skip
Bootbus init.................................................................OK
DDR DRAM init................................................................OK
Memory Data Bus Walk '0' Test .............................................pass
Memory Data Bus Walk '1' Test .............................................Pass
Memory Address Bus Walk '0' Test ..........................................Pass
Memory Address Bus Walk '1' Test ..........................................Pass
Start Memory 5-Step Test ? ('t' or 'T' is test):skip
DDR DRAM TEST................................................................OK
When Start L2 Cache Test ? ('t' is test): is displayed, you can enter t to continue to check
Level 2 cache. Alternatively, you can enter skip to ignore the check.
When Start Memory 5-Step Test ? ('t' or 'T' is test): is displayed, you can enter t to continue
to check memory. Alternatively, you can enter skip to ignore checking.
If you need to check the memory of the S9300 after entering skip, press the shortcut keys Ctrl
+T within two seconds. The terminal displays the following message:
Testing DDR SDRAM, please wait for a few minutes
The detected DDR SDRAM size is: 1024MB
Testing DDR SDRAM: 1024MB ....... pass
Took time: 23s
Press Ctrl+A within 2 seconds to enter the Basic BootROM menu. The terminal displays the
following message:
Starting...
The Basic BootROM menu is as follows:
Update Bootrom Menu (Ver 102)
Creation date: Mar 6 2009, 15:59:02

1. Update bootrom through serial interface
2. Update bootload through serial interface
3. Modify serial interface parameter
4. Boot from bootload system
5. Reboot
You can upgrade the basic BootROM and Bootload through the Basic BootROM menu. The
terminal displays the following message:
Starting at 0x6c00000...
Process of Booting the Bootload Software
The bootload software initializes the hardware of the device and shows hardware parameters.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 9 Rebooting
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
144
****************************************************
* *
* S9300 Bootrom, Ver 102 *
* *
****************************************************

Copyright(C) 2008-2026 by HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Creation date: Feb 25 2009, 14:54:14

PCB Version : LE02SRUA VER.B
CPU type : Cavium Octeon
CPU L2 Cache : 128KB
CPU Clock Speed : 700MHz
BUS Clock Speed : 133MHz
Memory Type : DDR2 SDRAM
Memory Size : 1024MB
Memory Speed : 667MHz
Press Ctrl+B within 3 seconds. The S9300 prompts you to enter a password for entering the
Bootload menu. The terminal displays the following message:
password:
If you enter a correct password, you can enter the Bootload menu. The default password is
9300. The Bootload menu is as follows:
1. Boot with default mode
2. Boot from Flash
3. Boot from CFCard
4. Enter serial submenu
5. Enter ethernet submenu
6. Modify Flash description area
7. Modify bootrom password
8. Reboot
Enter your choice(1-8):
Through the Bootload menu, you can upgrade the system software or specify the system software
to be loaded for starting the S9300.
The extended BootROM software initializes the serial port and the console port, and
decompresses and boots the system software. The terminal displays the following message:
Auto-booting...
Booting from CFCard...
Loading............................................................Done!
Uncompressing...Done!
Now, the BootROM software booting is complete, and the S9300 starts to load the system
software.
9.3 Process of Booting the System Software
The section describes the process of booting the system software.
The S9300 system software provides basic features. The process of booting the system software
is as follows:
1. Boot the operating system.
2. Boot the virtual file system and the console terminal.
3. Initialize the Line Process Unit (LPU), interfaces, power modules, and fans.
4. Boot the modules of different features.
5. Activate the command line interface (CLI).
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 9 Rebooting
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
145
The S9300 implements the Virtual Operating System (VOS) by adopting the technology of
Distributed Object-oriented Programmable Realtime Architecture (DOPRA). The process of
booting the system software is as follows:
Starting at 0x400000...
Initializing Flash Module...................................................Done

Press ENTER to get started.


When the terminal displays the preceding message, the system software has started. Press
Enter to enter the command line interface.
9.4 Rebooting the S9300
This section describes how to reboot the S9300.
Context
NOTE
All the commands for upgrading the system software are used in the user view.
9.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before rebooting the S9300, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the
pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This helps you complete the configuration
task quickly and accurately.
Applicable Environment
After upgrading the S9300, you need to reboot it.
Pre-configuration Tasks
None.
Data Preparation
None.
9.4.2 (Optional) Rebooting the S9300 Through Command Lines
You can use commands to reboot the S9300 immediately.
Context
CAUTION
Be cautious to use the reboot command because it can break down the whole network for a short
period of time. Before you reboot the S9300 through the reboot command, the system compares
the current configuration with that saved in the configuration file. If they are not consistent, the
system prompts you to save the current configuration. Ensure that correct files are used for
rebooting the S9300.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 9 Rebooting
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
146
Do as follows on the S9300 that needs to be rebooted immediately:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
reboot [ fast | save diagnostic-information ]
The S9300 is rebooted immediately.
By default, this command can only be run by users at the management level.
----End
9.4.3 (Optional) Rebooting the S9300 Immediately by Pressing the
Power Button
You can use press the power button to restart the S9300 immediately.
Context
CAUTION
Be cautious to perform this operation because it can break down the entire network for a short
period of time. Before you reboot the S9300 through the power button, check whether
configuration files need be saved and ensure that correct files are used for rebooting the
S9300. For details on saving configuration files, see the Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration.
Do as follows on the S9300 that needs to be rebooted immediately:
Procedure
Step 1 Press the RST button of the S9300 to reboot theS9300.
----End
9.4.4 (Optional) Rebooting the S9300 on Schedule Using Command
Lines
You can use commands to reboot the S9300 on schedule.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 9 Rebooting
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
147
Context
CAUTION
Be cautious to use the schedule reboot command because it can break down the whole network
for a short period of time.
Before you run the schedule reboot command to reboot the S9300 on schedule, check whether
configuration files need be saved and ensure that correct files are used for rebooting the
S9300. For details on saving configuration files, see the Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Basic Configuration.
Do as follows on the S9300 that needs to be rebooted on schedule:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
schedule reboot { at exact-time | delay interval }
On-schedule reboot is configured. You can specify the time for rebooting theS9300 by setting
type.
l at time: specifies the specific time for rebooting the S9300.
l delay interval: specifies the waiting time before rebooting the S9300.
By default, this command can only be run by users at the management level. By default, the time
for rebooting the S9300 is not set. That is, on-schedule reboot is not enabled.
----End
9.4.5 Checking the Configuration
After using commands to reboot the S9300 on schedule, you can view information about on-
schedule reboot of the S9300.
Prerequisite
On-schedule reboot has been enabled through command lines.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display schedule reboot command to check configurations about on-schedule reboot
of the S9300.
----End
Example
If information about on-schedule reboot of the S9300 is displayed, it means that the configuration
succeeds.
<Quidway> display schedule reboot
Info:System will reboot at 00:00:00 2007/10/30 (in 23 hours and 53 minutes).
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 9 Rebooting
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
148
10 ISSU Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the process of the ISSU and how to configure ISSU to shorten service
interruption during the upgrade and thus improve device reliability.
10.1 Introduction to ISSU
In-Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) provides a mechanism to shorten service interruption
during upgrade and rollback of the software version. ISSU greatly reduces service interruption
time to the maximum extent during software upgrade, improving device reliability. ISSU also
minimizes the impact of upgrade failure on the system through rollback.
10.2 ISSU Supported by the S9300
The ISSU features include the ISSU modes, and the ISSU process.
10.3 Implementing ISSU
By implementing ISSU, you can implement the software upgrade on a single device without
service interruption.
10.4 Maintaining ISSU
This section describes how to maintain ISSU.
10.5 Configuration Examples
The following section provides an example of the ISSU process. Familiarize yourself with the
configuration procedures against the networking diagram. The configuration example consists
of the networking requirements, configuration roadmap, configuration procedures, and
configuration files.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
149
10.1 Introduction to ISSU
In-Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) provides a mechanism to shorten service interruption
during upgrade and rollback of the software version. ISSU greatly reduces service interruption
time to the maximum extent during software upgrade, improving device reliability. ISSU also
minimizes the impact of upgrade failure on the system through rollback.
Requirements for the System
ISSU has the following requirements for the system:
l The software running in the system supports ISSU.
l Main control boards work in 1:1 backup mode. The interface board does not support 1:1
backup. During ISSU, the standby main board (SMB) is upgraded to the new version. Then
the SMB replaces the original active main board (AMB). Finally, the original AMB is
upgraded to the new version and ISSU of the whole device is complete.
l The configuration data of different versions can be synchronized between the AMB and
SMB before the active/standby switchover. ISSU synchronizes the configuration data
between the AMB and the SMB by restoring configurations. That is, the AMB saves a
temporary configuration file, through which the SMB restores the configurations.
10.2 ISSU Supported by the S9300
The ISSU features include the ISSU modes, and the ISSU process.
ISSU Mode
S9300 supports two ISSU modes:
l Lossless ISSU
In this mode, the configurations and data of the old AMB are synchronized with the new
AMB; the configurations and data of the old process on the interface board are synchronized
with the new process on the interface board. This upgrade mode requires a higher
performance of the system.
l Lossy ISSU
In this mode, the configurations of the old AMB are synchronized with the new AMB; the
configurations of the old process on the interface board are synchronized with the new
process on the interface board; however, the dynamic data is not synchronized.
The S9300 supports lossy ISSU. In lossy ISSU mode, the configurations of the original AMB
are synchronized to the new AMB. The dynamic data, however, is not synchronized.
NOTE
In lossless or lossy ISSU, the interface board that does not support ISSU is commonly reset. In this way,
the interface board is commonly reset at the ISSU plane switch phase.
ISSU Process
The ISSU process is as follows:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
150
1. ISSU resets the SMB based on the new version.
2. Data synchronization and configuration restoration are performed between the AMB and
the SMB.
3. The control planes of the AMB and SMB are switched and the interface board restarts
quickly. Then the version is upgraded.
10.3 Implementing ISSU
By implementing ISSU, you can implement the software upgrade on a single device without
service interruption.
10.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before implementing ISSU, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the
pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete the
configuration task quickly and accurately.
Application Environment
ISSU ensures the reliability of upgrades, reduces service interruption time, and relieves the
impact of upgrade on users.
Before ISSU, ensure that the current version of the system supports ISSU. During ISSU, it is
recommended that you not make any change on hardware.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before implementing ISSU, complete the following tasks:
l Powering on the switch and starting it normally
l Downloading resource files of the new version to the AMB and SMB.
Data Preparation
To implement ISSU, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Length of the ISSU rollback timer

10.3.2 (Optional) Configuring ISSU Precheck
Before implementing ISSU, the operator must check whether ISSU can be implemented on the
device.
Context
Before implementing ISSU, you can run the issu precheck command to perform precheck.Check
the ISSU modes supported by service modules.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
151
ISSU precheck has little impact on the system and does not cause the SMB to reset, and thus
can be used in non-ISSU phases.
Do as follows on the device on which ISSU is performed:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
issu precheck system-software system-file
The ISSU precheck is performed.
After ISSU precheck is complete, the system automatically provides the precheck result.
----End
10.3.3 (Optional) Configuring the Length of the ISSU Rollback
Timer
You can set the value of the ISSU rollback timer. After the configuration, you must complete
the upgrade before the timer expires; otherwise, the upgrade fails.
Context
Do as follows on the device on which ISSU is performed:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
issu timer rollback time
The length of the ISSU rollback timer is set.
When the system enters the ISSU check phase, the ISSU rollback timer is automatically activated
and its length is 120 minutes by default.
----End
10.3.4 Implementing ISSU
By implementing ISSU, you can shorten service interruption and improve reliability of a device.
Context
During implementing ISSU, follow the prompts and interactive information of the system.
Do as follows on the device on which ISSU is performed:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
issu check system-software system-file
ISSU is checked.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
152
Once the command is run, the system has entered the ISSU check phase. ISSU check has the
following impact on the system:
l The SMB is reset on the basis of the new version and then becomes the new AMB.
l The ISSU rollback timer is activated. ISSU must be finished before the timer expires.
Otherwise, ISSU may fail.
For the interactive information and description during ISSU check, refer to Table 10-1.
Table 10-1 Description of the issu check command output
Interactive information Description
Warning: The value of the ISSU
rollback timer is 120 minutes. The
system will begin the ISSU upgrade.
Continue? [Y/N]:
Warning: The length of the ISSU rollback timer is
120 minutes. The system will start ISSU.
Continue? [Y/N]
l If you enter y, the system starts ISSU and
performs ISSU check.
l If you enter n, the system aborts the running of
the issu check command and then quits ISSU.
Warning: The slave board will be
rebooted and check the software
compatibility. Continue? [Y/N]:
Warning: The SMB will be reset and then the
system will check software compatibility.
Continue? [Y/N]
l When you enter y, the SMB will be reset on the
basis of the new version. The process lasts
about two minutes in normal situations. After
the SMB is reset, the system checks software
compatibility.
l If you enter n, the system aborts the running of
the issu check command and then quits ISSU.
NOTE
When the R version of the source version is the same as
that of the target version, the preceding prompt is
displayed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
153
Interactive information Description
Warning: The slave board will be
rebooted and generate the configuration
file. Continue? [Y/N]:
Warning: The SMB will be reset and then the
system will generate a configuration file.
Continue? [Y/N]
l When you enter y, the SMB will be reset on the
basis of the new version. The process lasts
about two minutes in normal situations. After
the SMB is reset, the old AMB (that is, the SMB
before reset) generates a configuration file.
l If you enter n, the system aborts the running of
the issu check command and then quits ISSU.
NOTE
l When the R version of the source version is different
from that of the target version, the preceding prompt
is displayed.
l When ISSU is performed between different R
versions, the system supports the ISSU lossy mode
only. After the SMB is reset, the system skips
software compatibility check, and instead the old
AMB (that is, the SMB before reset) generates a
configuration file.

Step 2 Run:
issu start
ISSU is started.
If you need to abort ISSU, run the Step 3 command.
For the interactive information and description during ISSU startup, refer to Table 10-2.
Table 10-2 Description of the issu start command output
Interactive information Description
Info: The Lossy ISSU process will start.
Continue? [Y/N]:
Info: Lossy ISSU will start. Continue ?
l If you enter y, the system starts ISSU in lossy
mode.
l If you enter n, the system aborts the running of
the issu start command and waits for the next
operation.
If you need to continue to perform ISSU, run
the issu start command according to the
prompt before the ISSU timer for version
rollback expires.
If you need to abort ISSU, run the issu
abort command.
If you do not run the issu start or issu
abort command before the ISSU timer for
version rollback expires, the system rolls
back and quits ISSU.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
154

Step 3 (Optional) Run:
issu abort
ISSU is aborted.
l If you need to abort ISSU, follow this step instead of Step Step 4 and Step Step 5.
l If you need to continue ISSU, skip this step and follow Step Step 4.
For interactive information and description during ISSU check, refer to Table 10-3.
Table 10-3 Description of the issu abort command output
Interactive information Description
Warning: The ISSU upgrade will be
aborted, and the system will roll back
to old version. Continue? [Y/N]:
Warning: The ISSU will be aborted, and the system
will roll back to the old version. Continue? [Y/N]
l If you enter y, the ISSU is aborted, and the system
will roll back to the old version.
l If you enter n, the system aborts the running of the
issu abort command and continues ISSU.
Warning: The ISSU will be aborted,
the system will be rolled back to the
old version, and the new AMB will
be rebooted. This operation will take
10 minutes. Continue? [Y/N]:
Warning: The ISSU upgrade will be aborted, the
system will roll back to the old version, and the new
AMB will be reset on the basis of the old version. The
process lasts 10 minutes. Continue? [Y/N]
l If you enter y, the ISSU upgrade is aborted, the
system will roll back to the old version, and the new
AMB will be reset on the basis of the old version.
l If you enter n, the system aborts the running of the
issu abort command and continues ISSU.

Step 4 Run:
issu switchover [ force ]
The planes are switched.
NOTE
During the ISSU plane switch, the Telnet connection may be terminated. This indicates a normal situation
and you need to wait for 30 seconds. After 30 seconds, you can press Enter to re-log in to the device that
performs ISSU.
Step 5 Run:
issu confirm
ISSU is confirmed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
155
NOTE
If you check the status of the AMB and SMB after the ISSU plane switch is complete, you can find that
the new AMB is still in the slave state. This is because the hardware switch has not finished yet. After you
run the issu confirm command to confirm the ISSU operation and the old AMB restarts with the new
version, check the status of the AMB and SMB. At this time, you can find that both ISSU plane switch and
hardware switch are complete and the status of the new AMB becomes Master.
----End
10.3.5 Checking the Configuration
By viewing the value of the ISSU timer and the backup status, you can check whether the
configurations are successful.
Prerequisite
All configurations of ISSU are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display issu timer rollback command to view the length of the ISSU rollback
timer.
l Run the display issu module command to view the modules that supports ISSU.
l Run the display issu check-result command to view the result of ISSU check.
l Run the display issu backup state command to view the status of ISSU backup.
l Run the display issu backup-result [ state { resource-prepare | backup-prepare |
backup1 | backup2 | backup3 | smooth | smooth-all-over } ] command to view the result
of ISSU backup.
l Run the display issu recover-configuration command to view the commands that fail to
restore configurations.
l Run the display issu switch-result { check | prepare | age } command to view the result
of ISSU switch check, switch preparation, and the cause of switch failure.
l Run the display issu state command to view which ISSU phase the system passes.
----End
Example
Run the display issu timer rollback command to view the length of the ISSU rollback timer.
<Quidway> display issu timer rollback
The length of the rollback timer is 60 minutes. There are 31 minutes left.
Run the display issu module command to view the modules that supports ISSU.
<Quidway> display issu module
-----------------------------------------------------------
Slot ModuleId ModuleName
-----------------------------------------------------------
8 0x41470000 AAA
8 0x40E90000 ND
8 0x40E00000 FIB6
8 0x41270000 RPR
8 0x416E0000 ARP
8 0x40A40000 CHDLC
8 0x400F0000 DHCPS
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
156
8 0x400D0000 DHCPR
8 0x404A0000 PPP
8 0x40910000 FR
8 0x40CF0000 ATM
8 0x40010000 FIB
8 0x500000 IFNET
8 0x416C0000 BFD
8 0x417D0000 6OVER4
8 0x417E0000 TUNNEL6
8 0x40B60000 GRE
8 0x40B70000 TUNNEL
8 0x412F0000 L2VPN
8 0x41590000 TRUNK
8 0x411C0000 L2IF
8 0x40340000 VRRP
8 0x40800000 VGMP
8 0x41760000 DHCPSNP
8 0x419E0000 LAG
8 0x417A0000 RRPP
8 0x411E0000 MSTP
8 0x41920000 MINM
8 0x418F0000 802.1AG
8 0x418D0000 802.3AH
8 0x418E0000 OAM-MGR
8 0x41770000 QINQ
8 0x41820000 SNPG
8 0x41710000 MPLS OAM
8 0x40210000 MFIB
8 0x41B40000 MCTRUNK
8 0xFF880000 MID_ISSU_PDT
8 0x70010000 LSPM
8 0x705F0000 LDP
8 0x70230000 RSVP
8 0x70110000 ISIS
8 0x70120000 RM
8 0x70170000 OSPF
8 0x70180000 BGP
8 0x70290000
8 0x702B0000 TNLM
8 0x70320000 L3VPN V6
8 0x70040000 CSPF
8 0x70140000 RIP
8 0x70150000 RIPng
8 0x701D0000 OSPFv3
8 0x70240000 UDP6
8 0x70250000 RAW IP6
8 0x70260000 TCP6
8 0x70850000 KEY CHAIN
8 0x70190000 IGMP
8 0x701B0000 PIM
8 0x701E0000 MRM
8 0x701F0000 MRM6
8 0x70200000 MD
8 0x706E0000 MLD
8 0x706F0000 PIM6
8 0x702D0000 MSDP
-----------------------------------------------------------
Run the display issu check-result command to view the result of ISSU check.
<Quidway> display issu check-result
System upgrade type : Lossy
System maximum down time : 600s
Interface board compatibility:
---------------------------------------------------------
Slot Type SupportStatus MaxDownTime(s) Reason
---------------------------------------------------------
4 LPU fast-reboot 600 NULL
6 LPU fast-reboot 600 NULL
---------------------------------------------------------
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
157
Run the display issu backup state command to view the status of ISSU backup.
<Quidway> display issu backup state
System backup status: real-time backup
Run the display issu backup-result [ state { resource-prepare | backup-prepare | backup1
| backup2 | backup3 | smooth | smooth-all-over } ] command to view the result of ISSU backup.
<Quidway> display issu backup-result
System backup-result:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
State Result
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
resource-prepare success
backup-prepare success
backup1 success
backup2 success
backup3 success
smooth -
smooth-all-over -
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interface board backup-result:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot State Result
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Run the display issu recover-configuration command to view the result of ISSU configuration
restoration.
<Quidway> display issu recover-configuration
---------------------------------------------------------------
Slot ViewName CommandLine
Reason
---------------------------------------------------------------
9 System-view display bgp peer
parse failure
9 Interface Ethernet 1/0/0 display this
run failure
---------------------------------------------------------------
Run the display issu switch-result { check | prepare | age } command to view the result of
ISSU switch and switch preparation, and the cause of switch failure.
<Quidway> display issu switch-result check
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Type Result
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 new AMB succeeded
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Run the display issu state command to view which ISSU phase the system passes.
<Quidway> display issu state
------------------------------------------------
Phase State
------------------------------------------------
1.ISSU check finished
2.ISSU start finished
3.ISSU switchover finished
4.ISSU confirm -
------------------------------------------------
The cancel ISSU command : issu abort.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
158
10.4 Maintaining ISSU
This section describes how to maintain ISSU.
10.4.1 Monitoring the Running Status of ISSU
By monitoring the operation status of ISSU, you can view information about ISSU.
Context
In routine maintenance, you can run the following command in any view to display the running
of ISSU.
Procedure
l Run the display issu timer rollback command in the user view to view the length of the
ISSU rollback timer.
l Run the display issu module command in the user view to view the modules that supports
ISSU.
l Run the display issu check-result command in the user view to check the result of ISSU
check.
l Run the display issu backup state command in the user view to check the status of ISSU
backup.
l Run the display issu backup-result [ state { resource-prepare | backup-prepare |
backup1 | backup2 | backup3 | smooth | smooth-all-over } ] command in the user view
to view the result of ISSU backup.
l Run the display issu recover-configuration command in the user view to view the result
of ISSU configuration restoration.
l Run the display issu switch-result { check | prepare | age } command in the user view to
view the result of ISSU switch check, switch preparation, and the cause of switch failure.
----End
10.5 Configuration Examples
The following section provides an example of the ISSU process. Familiarize yourself with the
configuration procedures against the networking diagram. The configuration example consists
of the networking requirements, configuration roadmap, configuration procedures, and
configuration files.
10.5.1 Example for Implementing ISSU
In this example, through the introduction to the ISSU process, you can configure ISSU to
minimize service interruption during the software upgrade.
Networking Requirements
ISSU can be performed on a single device in any networking environment.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
159
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Perform ISSU precheck to check whether ISSU modes supported by each module.
2. Set the length of the ISSU rollback timer.
3. Perform ISSU feasibility check.
4. Start ISSU.
5. Switch planes.
6. Confirm ISSU.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l System software, PAF file, and License file of the new version
l Length of the ISSU rollback timer
Procedure
Step 1 Perform ISSU precheck.
<Quidway> issu precheck system-software S9300V100R006.cc
System upgrade type : lossy
System maximum down time : 600 seconds
Interface board compatibility:
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Slot Type SupportStatus MaxDownTime(s) Reason
-------------------------------------------------------------------
4 LPU fast-reboot 600 NULL
6 LPU fast-reboot 600 NULL
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 2 Set the length of the ISSU rollback timer to 120 minutes.
<Quidway> issu timer rollback 120
Step 3 Perform ISSU check to determine ISSU mode.
<Quidway> issu check system-software S9300V100R006.cc
Warning: The value of the ISSU rollback timer is 120 minutes. The system will begin
the ISSU upgrade. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: The system is comparing compatibility ID...
Info: The system is checking the hardware compatibility...
Warning: The slave board will be rebooted and check the software compatibility.
Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: The slave board is rebooting in cfcard:/S9300V100R006.cc...
Info: The new AMB is registered.
Info: The system is generating the configuration file...
Info: The system supports Lossy ISSU.
Info: Any of the following operations can be performed as required:
1. View detailed information about ISSU check result by using the display command
(display issu check-result).
2. The ISSU rollback timer can be configured before ISSU start by using the command
(issu timer rollback). The default value of the timer is 120 minutes.
3. To start ISSU, Run the command (issu start). Otherwise, the system will roll back
to the old version after the ISSU timer time out.
4. To rollback the system to the old version immediately, run the command (issu
abort).
Step 4 Start ISSU.
<Quidway> issu start
Info: The Lossy ISSU process will start. Continue? [Y/N]:y
Info: The system will start lossy ISSU upgrade.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
160
Info: The system is copying the configuration file...
Info: The operation of copying the configuration file is complete.
Info: The system is preparing resources...
Info: The resource preparation is complete.
Info: The system is preparing for batch backup...
Info: The preparation for batch backup is complete.
Info: The system is busy with phase 1 batch backup...
Info: Phase 1 batch backup is complete.
Info: The system is busy with configuration recovery of the new AMB...
Warning: Some errors occurred in the configuration recovery of the new AMB phase.
The top error level: Not Affect ISSU Upgrade. Detailed information can be obtained
by using the command (display issu recover-configuration) in the new AMB.
Info: Configuration recovery of the new AMB is complete.
Info: The system is busy with phase 2 batch backup...
Info: Phase 2 batch backup is complete.
Info: Configuration of interface boards is recovering...
Info: Configuration recovery of interface boards is complete.
Info: The system is busy with phase 3 batch backup...
Info: Phase 3 batch backup is complete.
Info: The system is in real-time backup phase. Please check the backup status
before performing the ISSU switchover (Command: display issu backup state; issu
switchover).
Step 5 Switch planes.
<Quidway> issu switchover
Info: The system will check the ready mode of all modules first. Please wait...
Info: The check for the switchover between forwarding planes starts...
Info: The check for the switchover on slot 7 succeeded.
Info: The check for the switchover between forwarding planes is complete.
Info: The switchover between the forwarding planes starts...
Warning: The connect of telnet will be down, please retry after 30 seconds.
NOTE
During the ISSU plane switch, the Telnet connection may be terminated. This indicates a normal situation
and you need to wait for 30 seconds. After 30 seconds, you can press Enter to re-log in to the device that
performs ISSU.
Step 6 Confirm ISSU on the new AMB.
<Quidway> issu confirm
Info: The slave MPU of the new version reboots. After the reboot is complete, the
system automatically exits from ISSU.
NOTE
If you check the status of the AMB and SMB after the ISSU plane switch is complete, you can find that
the new AMB is still in the slave state. This is because the hardware switch has not finished yet. After you
run the ISSU confirm command to confirm the ISSU operation and the old AMB restarts with the new
version, check the status of the AMB and SMB. At this time, you can find that both ISSU plane switch and
hardware switch are complete and the status of the new AMB becomes Master.
Step 7 Check whether the software version of the current system is correct to further confirm ISSU.
<Quidway> display startup
MainBoard:
Configured startup system software: cfcard:/S9300V100R006.cc
Startup system software: cfcard:/S9300V100R006.cc
Next startup system software: cfcard:/S9300V100R006.cc
Startup saved-configuration file: cfcard:/S9300cfg.cfg
Next startup saved-configuration file: cfcard:/S9300cfg.cfg
Startup paf file: cfcard:/paf.txt
Next startup paf file: cfcard:/paf.txt
Startup license file: cfcard:/license.txt
Next startup license file: cfcard:/license.txt
Startup patch package: cfcard:/$_patchstate_a.pat
Next startup patch package: cfcard:/$_patchstate_a.pat
SlaveBoard:
Configured startup system software: cfcard:/S9300V100R006.cc
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
161
Startup system software: cfcard:/S9300V100R006.cc
Next startup system software: cfcard:/S9300V100R006.cc
Startup saved-configuration file: cfcard:/S9300cfg.cfg
Next startup saved-configuration file: cfcard:/S9300cfg.cfg
Startup paf file: cfcard:/paf.txt
Next startup paf file: cfcard:/paf.txt
Startup license file: cfcard:/license.txt
Next startup license file: cfcard:/license.txt
Startup patch package: cfcard:/$_patchstate_a.pat
Next startup patch package: cfcard:/$_patchstate_a.pat
----End
Configuration Files
None
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 10 ISSU Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
162
11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization
Configuration
About This Chapter
The Ethernet clock syntonization technology synchronizes clocks through the Ethernet. This
chapter describes how to implement Ethernet clock syntonization on the S9300.
11.1 Overview of Ethernet Clock Syntonization
Compared with the Global Positioning System (GPS), the Ethernet Syntonization function
synchronizes the clock frequency on the Ethernet at lower costs.
11.2 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Features Supported by the S9300
This section describes the hardware of the S9300 required for implementing Ethernet clock
syntonization, and the clock sources and clock source selection modes supported by the
S9300.
11.3 Forcibly Specifying a Reference Clock Source
The S9300 allows you to forcibly specify a reference clock source flexibly.
11.4 Manually Specifying a Reference Clock Source
The S9300 allows you to manually specify a reference clock source flexibly.
11.5 Selecting a Clock Source Based on the Priority
When the SSM quality level is not used in clock source selection, you can select the clock source
based on the priority. This is a typical application scenario of Ethernet clock syntonization.
11.6 Selecting the Clock Source Based on the SSM Quality Level
If the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection, the S9300 selects the clock source
based on the SSM quality level and then based on the priority.
11.7 (Optional) Configuring Other Attributes of a Clock Source
This section describes the method of configuring other attributes of a clock source.
11.8 Configuration Examples
This section provides several configuration examples of Ethernet clock syntonization.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
163
11.1 Overview of Ethernet Clock Syntonization
Compared with the Global Positioning System (GPS), the Ethernet Syntonization function
synchronizes the clock frequency on the Ethernet at lower costs.
Concept of Clock Syntonization
On the data communication network, the sender needs to place the pulse signal in a specific time
slot, and the receiver needs to extract the pulse signal from the time slot. Therefore, to ensure
normal communication between the sender and the receiver, you must ensure clock
synchronization between them. This function is implemented by the clock.
Clock syntonization is used to keep the clock frequency difference among the network elements
on the digital network within a specific error range. If the clock frequency difference is out of
the allowed range, error codes and jitter may occur. This degrades the transmission performance.
Implementation of Ethernet Clock Syntonization
l The GPS provides an accurate clock.
l A device supporting Ethernet clock syntonization recovers clock signals from lines or
receives clock signals through BITS interfaces, and then transmits clock signals to
downstream devices. Then the clock frequency is synchronized through the Ethernet.
Advantages of Ethernet Clock Syntonization
l Costs of construction and security guarantee of the GPS are high, whereas costs of the
Ethernet clock syntonization technology are much lower.
l The Ethernet clock syntonization technology can be applied to existing Ethernet networks
so that these networks do not need to depend on the GPS.
11.2 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Features Supported by
the S9300
This section describes the hardware of the S9300 required for implementing Ethernet clock
syntonization, and the clock sources and clock source selection modes supported by the
S9300.
NOTE
To use the Ethernet clock synchronization features, you must install the CKM-clock board and G24CEAS
on the S9300.
Clock Signal Transmission
The S9300 can transmit clock signals on the Ethernet or synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
network.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
164
Clock Sources Supported by the S9300
Table 11-1 Clock sources supported by the S9300
Clock No. Name Description
0 Inner Clock Clock signal generated by the local oscillator of clock
board.
1 BITS0 Clock signal sent or received by the BITS0 interface of
the master main control board on local device.
2 BITS1 Clock signal sent or received by the BITS1 interface of
the master main control board on local device.
3 Peer Board
BITS0
Clock signal sent or received by the BITS0 interface of
the slave main control board on local device.
4 Peer Board
BITS1
Clock signal sent or received by the BITS1 interface of
the slave main control board on local device.
5 Left Frame Clock Clock signal sent from the left side of the frame by the
LPUs with smaller slot IDs.
l On the S9312, LPUs in slot 1 to slot 6 send clock
signals from the left side of the frame.
l On the S9306 and S9303, LPUs in slot 1 to slot 3 send
clock signals from the left side of the frame.
6 Right Frame
Clock
Clock signal sent from the right side of the frame by the
LPUs with greater slot IDs.
l On the S9312, LPUs in slot 7 to slot 12 send clock
signals from the right side of the frame.
l On the S9306, LPUs in slot 4 to slot 6 send clock
signals from the right side of the frame.
NOTE
All boards of the S9303 send clock signals from the left side of
the frame. Therefore, the S9303 does not have this clock.
7 FSU Clock source on the Flexible Service Unit (FSU). This
clock source is reserved.
8 Peer Board FSU Clock source on the FSU of peer board (MPU). This
clock source is reserved.
9 System Clock System clock.
10 Peer System
Clock
System clock of the peer board (MPU).

The clock sources are described as follows:
l The system clock, BITS0 clock, and BITS1 clock are external clocks used to synchronize
clock signals. Only external clocks need to select the clock source.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
165
l An external clock can function as the reference clock source of other clocks or send clock
signals. Other clocks can function only as the reference clock of external clocks.
l The system clock can select the reference clock source among clocks 0 to 8.
l The BITS clocks can select clocks 5 to 9 as the reference clock source.
Clock Source Selection Mode Supported by the S9300
The S9300 supports the follow modes of clock source selection:
l Free running
Non-SSM mode: The clock source is selected based on the priority. A smaller priority
level indicates a higher priority.
SSM mode: The clock source is selected based on the SSM quality level and priority.
The SSM quality level takes precedence over the priority in clock source selection.
The clock source with the highest SSM quality level is selected first.
When two clock sources have the same SSM quality level, the one with higher priority
is selected.
SSM extended mode: This mode is based on the SSM mode, and you can set the clock
source ID in this mode.
l Forcible mode
l Manual mode
The SSM quality level takes precedence over the priority when the SSM quality level is used in
clock source selection. In forcible mode, you can specify a clock source regardless of the SSM
quality level and priority of the clock source. In manual mode, you can specify a clock source
regardless of the priority of the clock source, but the SSM quality level still affects the selection
result.
If you enable the result of frequency offset check to affect clock source selection, the selection
result also depends on the result of frequency offset check. If the frequency offset of a clock is
out of the specified range, the signal of the clock is considered invalid (Signal-fail), and the clock
cannot be selected as the clock source.
11.3 Forcibly Specifying a Reference Clock Source
The S9300 allows you to forcibly specify a reference clock source flexibly.
11.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before forcibly specifying a reference clock source, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data.
Applicable Environment
Generally, the system selects the clock source automatically. You can forcibly select the clock
source of a clock in special situations.
You can forcibly specify a clock source regardless of the SSM quality level and priority of the
clock source. Different from the manual mode, you can specify a clock source in Signal-fail
state in forcible mode.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
166
l When you forcibly specify a clock source to replace the original clock source of the system
clock:
If the specified clock source is in Signal-fail state, the system automatically uses the
inner clock as the clock source.
When the specified clock source recovers, the system automatically uses this clock
source as the clock source.
l When you forcibly specify a clock source to replace the original clock source of a BITS
clock:
If the specified clock source is in Signal-fail state, the BITS clock automatically uses
the system clock as the clock source.
When the specified clock source recovers, the BITS clock automatically uses this clock
as the clock source.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before forcibly specifying a clock source, complete the following tasks:
l Setting parameters of the link layer protocol and IP addresses for the interfaces to ensure
that the link layer protocol on the interfaces is in Up state
l Configuring the routing protocol to make the IP routes between the nodes reachable
l Ensuring the clock that will be configured to meet the following conditions:
All clock sources provide valid clock signals.
The result of frequency offset check does not affect clock source selection or the
frequency offset of the clock sources is within the specified range.
The clock sources are not locked.
The priority of the clock is other than 255 (DIS) so that the clock can function as the
clock source.
Data Preparation
To forcibly specify a clock source, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Clock for which you want to forcibly select the clock source, namely, the system
clock, BITS0 clock, or BITS1 clock
2 Number of the new clock source (You can view the number of each clock source by
running the display clock description command.)

11.3.2 Forcibly Specifying a Reference Clock Source for the Main
Control Board
You can forcibly specify a reference clock source by using a certain command.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
167
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock force-switch source source { system | bits0 | bits1 }
A new reference clock source is forcibly specified for the system clock, BITS0 clock, or BITS1
clock.
l The number of the clock source for the system clock ranges from 0 to 8.
l The number of the clock source for the BITS clocks ranges from 5 to 9.
Table 11-2 shows the mappings between the clock source numbers and clock sources.
Table 11-2 Mappings between the clock source numbers and clock sources
Clock No. Clock Source
0 Inner Clock
1 BITS0
2 BITS1
3 Peer Board BITS0
4 Peer Board BITS1
5 Left Frame Clock
6 Right Frame Clock
7 FSU (reserved)
8 Peer Board FSU (reserved)
9 System Clock

----End
11.3.3 Checking the Configuration
After forcibly specifying a reference clock source, you can check the configuration by using the
following commands.
Prerequisite
The configurations of forcible clock source selection are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display clock mode command to view the mode of clock source selection.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
168
Step 2 Run the display clock selection command to view the current clock sources of the external
clocks.
NOTE
You can run either of the preceding commands to check the configuration of forcible clock source selection.
----End
11.4 Manually Specifying a Reference Clock Source
The S9300 allows you to manually specify a reference clock source flexibly.
11.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before manually specifying a reference clock source, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data.
Applicable Environment
When clock sources are configured with priorities but not configured with SSM quality levels,
you can manually specify a clock source if you need to select a clock with a lower priority as
the clock source.
NOTE
l You cannot manually specify a clock source in Signal-fail state.
l When the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection, you cannot specify a clock source whose
SSM quality level is lower than the SSM quality level of the current clock source.
l If the signal of the manually specified clock source becomes invalid or if the SSM quality level of the
clock source degrades, the system automatically enters the free running state. The specified clock source
never takes effect again even if its signal or quality level recovers.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before manually specifying a clock source, complete the following tasks:
l Setting parameters of the link layer protocol and IP addresses for the interfaces to ensure
that the link layer protocol on the interfaces is in Up state
l Configuring the routing protocol to make the IP routes between the nodes reachable
l Ensuring the clock that will be configured to meet the following conditions:
All clock sources provide valid clock signals.
The result of frequency offset check does not affect clock source selection or the
frequency offset of the clock sources is within the specified range.
The clock sources are not locked.
The priority of the clock is other than 255 (DIS) so that the clock can function as the
clock source.
Data Preparation
To manually specify a clock source, you need the following data.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
169
No. Data
1 Clock for which you want to manually select the clock source, namely, the system
clock, BITS0 clock, or BITS1 clock
2 Number of the new clock source (You can view the number of each clock source by
running the display clock description command.)

11.4.2 Manually Specifying a Reference Clock Source for the Main
Control Board
You can manually a reference clock source by using a certain command.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock manual-switch source source { system | bits0 | bits1 }
A new reference clock source is manually specified for the system clock, BITS0, or BITS1 clock.
l The number of the clock source for the system clock ranges from 0 to 8.
l The number of the clock source for the BITS clocks ranges from 5 to 9.
Table 11-3 shows the mappings between the clock source numbers and clock sources.
Table 11-3 Mappings between the clock source numbers and clock sources
Clock No. Clock Source
0 Inner Clock
1 BITS0
2 BITS1
3 Peer Board BITS0
4 Peer Board BITS1
5 Left Frame Clock
6 Right Frame Clock
7 FSU (reserved)
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
170
Clock No. Clock Source
8 Peer Board FSU (reserved)
9 System Clock

----End
11.4.3 Checking the Configuration
After manually specifying a reference clock source, you can check the configuration by using
the following commands.
Prerequisite
The configurations of manual clock source selection are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display clock mode command to check the mode of clock source selection.
Step 2 Run the display clock selection command to check the current clock sources of the external
clocks.
NOTE
You can run either of the preceding commands to check the configuration of manual clock source selection.
----End
11.5 Selecting a Clock Source Based on the Priority
When the SSM quality level is not used in clock source selection, you can select the clock source
based on the priority. This is a typical application scenario of Ethernet clock syntonization.
11.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before selecting configuring clock source selection based on the priority, familiarize yourself
with the applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required
data.
Applicable Environment
When there are multiple clock sources, you can set different priorities for them. In normal
situations, a clock board uses the clock source of the highest priority. If no clock source is
specified forcibly or manually and the SSM quality level is not used in clock source selection,
when the clock source of the highest priority fails, the clock board uses the clock source of the
second highest priority.
To implement clock syntonization on the entire network, you can set priorities of clock sources
to ensure that the clock source on the input line of the primary reference clock has the highest
priority on each device.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
171
The primary reference clock must be stable. When configuring multiple clock sources, you need
to clock a backup clock transmission path. When clock signals are lost on the original clock
transmission path, a new clock source is selected and clock signals are transmitted on the backup
path.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before selecting the clock source based on the priority, complete the following tasks:
l Setting parameters of the link layer protocol and IP addresses for the interfaces to ensure
that the link layer protocol on the interfaces is in Up state
l Configuring the routing protocol to make the IP routes between the nodes reachable
l Disabling the SSM quality level from being used in clock source selection
l Cancelling the configuration of forcible or manual clock source selection
l Ensuring the clock that will be configured to meet the following conditions:
All clock sources provide valid clock signals.
The result of frequency offset check does not affect clock source selection or the
frequency offset of the clock sources is within the specified range.
The clock sources are not locked.
Data Preparation
To select the clock source based on the priority, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Priority of each clock source determined by the SSM quality level or other factors
2 Clock for which you want to select the clock source based on the priority, namely,
the system clock, BITS0 clock, or BITS1 clock
3 Number of each clock source

11.5.2 Setting the Priority of a Clock Source
After you set priorities of clock sources, the system selects the reference clock source based on
priorities.
Context
To perform clock switchover of the clock source based on the priority, you need to disable the
SSM quality level from being used in clock source selection.
Do as follows on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
172
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock priority priority source source { system | bits0 | bits1 }
By default, the priority of the inner clock source and system clock source is 254, and the priority
of other clock sources is 255. A smaller priority value indicates a higher priority.
The priority is set for a clock source.
l The number of the clock source for the system clock ranges from 0 to 8.
l The number of the clock source for the BITS clocks ranges from 5 to 9.
Table 11-4 shows the mappings between the clock source numbers and clock sources.
Table 11-4 Mappings between the clock source numbers and clock sources
Clock No. Clock Source
0 Inner Clock
1 BITS0
2 BITS1
3 Peer Board BITS0
4 Peer Board BITS1
5 Left Frame Clock
6 Right Frame Clock
7 FSU (reserved)
8 Peer Board FSU (reserved)
9 System Clock

----End
11.5.3 Checking the Configuration
After configuring clock source selection based on priorities of clock sources, you can check the
configuration by using the following commands.
Prerequisite
The configurations of the clock source priority are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display clock mode command to view the mode of clock source selection.
Step 2 Run the display clock selection command to view the current clock sources of the external
clocks.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
173
11.6 Selecting the Clock Source Based on the SSM Quality
Level
If the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection, the S9300 selects the clock source
based on the SSM quality level and then based on the priority.
11.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Before configuring clock source selection based on the SSM quality level, familiarize yourself
with the applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required
data.
Applicable Environment
If multiple clock sources can obtain their SSM quality levels, the system can select the reference
clock source based on the SSM quality level. If no reference clock source is specified forcibly,
the clock board uses the clock source of the highest SSM quality level. If this clock source fails,
the clock source uses the clock source of the second highest SSM quality level. The SSM quality
level of the external clock source will change to the SSM quality level of the clock source selected
by the system.
The SSM quality level takes precedence over the priority in clock source selection; therefore,
the SSM quality level of the primary reference clock source must be the highest so that clock
syntonization can be implemented on the entire network.
The SSM quality levels, in descending order, are Primary Reference Clock (PRC),
Synchronization Supply Unit-T (SSU-T), Synchronization Supply Unit-L (SSU-L), SDH
Equipment Clock (SEC), and Do Not Use (DNU). If the SSM level of a clock source is DNU,
and if the SSM level is used in clock source selection, this clock source will not be selected as
the reference clock source. The default SSM quality level of the inner clock and system clock
(19.44 MHz) is SEC.
The primary reference clock must be stable. When configuring multiple clock sources, you need
to clock a backup clock transmission path. When clock signals are lost on the original clock
transmission path, a new clock source is selected and clock signals are transmitted on the backup
path.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before selecting the clock source based on the SSM quality level, complete the following tasks:
l Setting parameters of the link layer protocol and IP addresses for the interfaces to ensure
that the link layer protocol on the interfaces is in Up state.
l Configuring the routing protocol to make the IP routes between the nodes reachable.
l Cancelling the configuration of forcible clock source selection.
l Ensuring the clock that will be configured to meet the following conditions:
All clock sources provide valid clock signals.
The result of frequency offset check does not affect clock source selection or the
frequency offset of the clock sources is within the specified range.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
174
The clock sources are not locked.
Data Preparation
To select the clock source based on the SSM quality level, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 External clock for which you need to select the clock source based on the SSM quality
level
2 (Optional) Clock sources for which you need to set the SSM quality levels
3 (Optional) SSM quality levels of clock sources

11.6.2 Enabling the SSM Quality Level to Be Used in Clock Source
Selection
The S9300 selects the clock source based on the SSM quality level only after you enabling the
SSM level to be used in clock source selection.
Context
Do as follows on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock ql-enable [ extend ]
The SSM quality level is used in clock source selection.
By default, the SSM quality level is not used in clock source selection.
NOTE
To set clock source IDs to prevent timing loops, you must set the clock source selection mode to extended
SSM mode.
----End
11.6.3 (Optional) Setting the SSM Quality Level of a Clock Source
You can use different methods to set the SSM quality level of a clock source in different
scenarios.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
175
Context
l If the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection but the SSM quality level of a
clock source cannot be obtained, you can specify the SSM quality level of the clock source
by using the clock ssm-config command.
l If the S1 byte of a clock source obtained from the system is 0, the system considers the
SSM quality level of the clock source as the unknown level. By default, the unknown level
maps the DNU level and the clock source of this level is not selected. You can use the
clock ql-unknown command to set the unknown level to a higher level so that the clock
source can participate in clock source selection.
l When the BITS interface selects the clock source based on the SSM quality level:
If the BITS clock works in bps mode, the BITS interface obtains the SSM quality level
from the received SSM message. If the SSM quality level can be obtained from the
system, you do not need to run the clock ql-unknown and clock ssm-config commands.
If the SSM quality level cannot be obtained, you can run the clock ql-unknown and
clock ssm-config commands to specify the SSM quality level.
When the BITS clock works in 2 MHz mode, the clock does not have an SSM quality
level. If the SSM quality level needs to be used in clock source selection, run the clock
ssm-config command to set an SSM quality level for the clock.
Do as follows on the S9300 according to the receding description and actual situation.
Procedure
l Setting the SSM quality level of a clock source
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
The default SSM quality level of the local clock source and system clock (19.44 MHz)
is SEC.
2. Run:
clock ssm-config { prc | ssu-t | ssu-l | sec | dnu } source source
The SSM quality level of a clock source is set.
l Specifying the SSM quality level mapping the unknown quality level
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
clock ql-unknown { prc | ssu-t | ssu-l | sec }
The SSM quality level mapping the unknown quality level is specified.
The default SSM quality level of the local clock source and system clock (19.44 MHz)
is SEC.
NOTE
This command is applicable to the clock source whose SSM value is 0. The S9300 considers
the SSM quality level of such a clock source as the value set in this command.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
176
11.6.4 (Optional) Preventing Timing Loops Between BITS
Interfaces
You can prevent timing loops between BITS interfaces through configuration.
Context
The S9300 supports bidirectional communication on a BITS interface.
When the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection, unidirectional communication
causes loops because the SSM quality level returned from the remote end may be the same as
the SSM quality level sent from the local end. In this case, clock source selection for the BITS
interface is affected. The loops can be avoided through configurations.
Do as follows on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock force-out-s1 s1-dnu { bits0 | bits1 }
The S1 byte of the SSM message sent to the local BITS interface is set to DNU so that this clock
does not participate in clock source selection. This prevents timing loops between interconnected
devices.
----End
11.6.5 Checking the Configuration
After configuring clock source selection based on the SSM quality, you can check the
configuration by using the following commands.
Prerequisite
The configurations of clock source selection based on the SSM quality level are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display clock mode command to view the mode of clock source selection.
Step 2 Run the display clock selection command to view the current clock sources of the external
clocks.
----End
11.7 (Optional) Configuring Other Attributes of a Clock
Source
This section describes the method of configuring other attributes of a clock source.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
177
11.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
To control clock syntonization more effectively, perform the following operations:
l Set the transmission mode of clock syntonization and time synchronization of a BITS clock.
l Set the ID of a clock source to prevent timing loops generated in the SSM extended mode.
l Set the priorities of the clock sources provided by different interfaces to specify the
sequence of the clock signals sent from different interfaces to the main control board. Only
the interface of the highest priority can send the clock signal to the main control board.
l Lock a clock source to prevent the clock source from being selected.
l Enable the result of frequency offset check to affect clock source selection. The clock
sources with greater frequency offset have lower priority in clock source selection.
l Set the delay time for the system to consider a clock source lost and the wait-to-restore
(WTR) time of the clock source to prevent frequent switchover of clock sources caused by
network flapping.
l Set the permanent holding mode. In this mode, when all the clock sources are lost, the clock
module enters the holding state and retains the original frequency offset according to the
clock information traced before.
NOTE
The permanent holding mode is not recommended.
l Set the non-retrieve mode. In this mode, the system changes the clock source only when
the original clock source fails.
Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring the attributes of a clock source, complete the following tasks:
l Setting parameters of the link layer protocol and IP addresses for the interfaces to ensure
that the link layer protocol on the interfaces is in Up state
l Configuring the routing protocol to make the IP routes between the nodes reachable
l Setting the mode of clock source selection, that is, based on the SSM quality level or priority
Data Preparation
To configure the attributes of a clock source, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Clock mode or time mode of a BITS clock
2 ID of the clock source
3 Priority of the clock source provided by an interface
4 Clock source to be locked
5 Delay time for the system to consider a clock source lost
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
178
No. Data
6 WTR time of a clock source

11.7.2 Setting Clock Mode or Time Mode of a BITS Clock
Context
The BITS clock refers to the clock signal sent from the BITS interface to a network element.
The signal that a BITS clock receives depends on the signal that the BITS interface sends and
receives.
Do as follows on the S9300 as required.
NOTE
The interconnected devices must use the same transmission mode of the BITS clock.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock bits-type { bps-2m | hz-2m | bps-1544m } { bits0 | bits1 }
The clock mode is set for the BITS0 or BITS1 clock.
Or run:
clock bits-type { dcls-time | 1pps-tod } { in | out } { bits0 | bits1 }
The time mode is set for the BITS0 or BITS1 clock.
By default, the BITS clocks adopt the bps-2m mode, that is, the clock signal is transmitted at a
rate of 2 Mbit/s.
----End
11.7.3 Setting the ID of a Clock Source
Context
If the clock signals sent from a clock source are looped back to the sender directly or through
the network, it indicates that a timing loop occurs. Timing loops should be avoided in network
design. In extended SSM mode, the higher four bits of the S1 bytes are used to transmit the clock
source ID, which reduces timing loops on the network.
Do as follows on the S9300.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
179
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock id id source source
The ID of a clock source is set.
By default, there is no ID.
Step 3 (Optional) Run:
clock no-id-out { bits0 | bits1 }
The BITS0 or BITS1 interface is disabled from sending the ID of the clock source.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
clock no-id-out
The interface is disabled from sending the ID of the clock source.
----End
11.7.4 Configuring Attributes of the S1 Byte
Context
A multiframe transmitted between BITS interfaces consists of eight sub-multiframes. Each
frame contains five spare bits, namely, SA4 bit to SA8 bit. You can select any one of the spare
SA bits to transmit the SDH synchronization code (S1 byte). The eight frames jointly carry the
eight bits of the S1 byte.
You can specify the SA bit that is used to transmit the S1 byte.
In special scenarios, you need to manually set the S1 byte that an interface sends to adjust the
SSM quality level.
Do as follows on the S9300 according to the actual situation.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock recv-sa-bit { sa4 | sa5 | sa6 | sa7 | sa8 } { bits0 | bits1 }
The bit of the SA bits from which the SDH synchronization status code (S1 byte) is received is
specified.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
180
By default, the S1 byte is transmitted in the SA4 bit.
NOTE
If the sender and the receiver are both S9300s, you do not need to perform this step because the S9300 can
identify the S1 byte no matter which bit transmits it.
This step is performed when the S9300 synchronizes the clock with another type of device through the
BITS interface. In this case, you need to specify the same bit that transmits the S1 byte on both ends to
ensure that both ends can identify the S1 byte.
Step 3 Run:
clock send-sa-bit { sa4 | sa5 | sa6 | sa7 | sa8 } { bits0 | bits1 }
The bit of the SA packet that is used to transmit the SDH synchronization status code (S1 byte)
is specified.
By default, the S1 byte is transmitted in the SA4 bit.
Step 4 Run:
clock force-out-s1 { s1-prc | s1-ssu-t | s1-ssu-l | s1-sec | s1-dnu | else-s1-
byte } { bits0 | bits1 }
The content of the S1 byte sent from the BITS0 or BITS1 interface is set.
Normally, the clock module sets the S1 byte according to the SSM quality level of the clock
source selected by BITS.
Step 5 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 6 Run:
clock force-out-s1 { s1-prc | s1-ssu-t | s1-ssu-l | s1-sec | s1-dnu | else-s1-
byte }
The content of the S1 byte sent from the interface is set.
Normally, the clock module sets the S1 byte according to the SSM quality level of the clock
source selected by system.
----End
11.7.5 Setting the Priority of the Clock Signal That an Interface
Sends to the Clock Board
Context
You can set priorities of the clock signals sent to the clock board from the interfaces that the
clock signals enter to determine the direction of clock syntonization.
Do as follows on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
181
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
clock left-frame priority
The priority of the clock signal that the interface sends to the main control board from the left
side of the frame is set.
Or run:
clock right-frame priority
The priority of the clock signal that the interface sends to the main control board from the right
side of the frame is set.
The default priority is 255.
The greater the value is, the lower the priority is.
----End
11.7.6 Locking a Clock Source
Context
By locking a clock source, you can prevent the clock source from being selected.
Do as follows on the S9300 where you need prevent a clock source from being selected.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock lockout source source { system | bits0 | bits1 }
A clock source is locked and cannot be selected as the reference clock source.
By default, no clock is locked.
----End
11.7.7 Configuring Frequency Offset Check
Context
If the frequency offset of a clock source is out of the valid range, the clock source is considered
unavailable.
You affect the result of clock source selection by setting the valid range of frequency offset.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
182
Do as follows on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock freq-check
Frequency offset check is enabled to affect clock source selection.
By default, the result of frequency offset check does not affect clock source selection.
Step 3 Run:
clock freq-check-range left-range right-range
The valid range of the frequency offset is set. If the frequency offset of a clock source is out of
the specified range, the clock source fails to pass the frequency offset check.
By default, the valid range of the frequency offset is -9.2 ppm to 9.2 ppm.
----End
11.7.8 Setting the Delay Time for the System to Consider a Clock
Source Lost
Context
Setting the delay time for the system to consider a clock source lost can avoid some mistakes in
determining the clock source caused by occasional signal jitter on the network.
Do as follows on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock hold-off-time hold-off-time source source
The delay time for the system to consider a clock source lost is set.
By default, the delay time is 500 ms.
----End
11.7.9 Setting the WTR Time of a Clock Source
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
183
Context
Setting the WTR time of a clock source can avoid some mistakes in determining the clock source
caused by occasional signal jitter on the network.
Do as follows on the S9300.
NOTE
The default WTR time of a clock source is 1 minute. Generally, you do not need to change the default
value.
If you want to see the clock source switching result during debugging, set the WTR time to 0.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock wait-to-restore wait-to-restore-time source source
The wait-to-restore (WTR) time of a clock source is set.
By default, the WTR time of a clock source is 1 minute.
----End
11.7.10 Enable the Permanent Holding Mode of the Clock Module
Context
Do as follows on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock hold-for-ever
The permanent holding mode of the clock module is enabled. That is, the clock module holds
the clock information permanently after the clock source is lost.
By default, the clock module retains the clock information for 24 hours after the clock source is
lost.
----End
11.7.11 Configuring the Non-Retrieve Mode of the Clock Source
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
184
Context
Do as follows on the S9300.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
clock no-retrieve
The non-retrieve mode of the clock source is configured.
By default, the retrieve mode is used. That is, if a better clock source is found, the system selects
this clock source automatically.
----End
11.7.12 Checking the Configuration
Prerequisite
The configurations of the clock source attributes are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display clock { bits0 | bits1 } command to view the configuration of the BITS0 clock,
including the mode of the BITS0 clock, bit used to transmit the SDH synchronization status code
(S1 byte), content of the S1 byte that is set forcibly, and whether the ID of the clock source is
sent, and so on.
Step 2 Run the display clock source command to view information about clock sources, including the
validity of clock signals, SSM quality level, and ID of each clock source, and so on.
Step 3 Run the display clock state interface interface-type interface-number command to view the
clock status on an interface. You can use this command to query all the clock configurations on
an interface.
Step 4 Run the display clock freq-check-range command to view the valid range of the clock
frequency offset.
Step 5 Run the display clock freq-check-result command to view the result of frequency offset check.
Step 6 Run the display clock hold-off-time command to view the delay time for the system to consider
a clock source lost.
Step 7 Run the display clock wait-to-restore command to view the WTR time of each clock source.
Step 8 Run the display clock mode command to view whether the SSM quality level is used in clock
source selection, whether the result of frequency offset check affects clock source selection,
retrieve mode, holding mode, and running status of the clock module, and clock selection results
of the external clocks, and so on.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
185
Step 9 Run the display clock { left-frame | right-frame } command to view the priorities of the clock
signals that different interfaces send from the left side or right side of the frame.
Step 10 Run the display clock lockout command to view the locked clock sources.
Step 11 Run the display clock priority command to view the priorities of clock sources.
Step 12 Run the display clock ql-unknown command to view the SSM quality level mapping the
unknown level.
Step 13 Run the display clock selection command to view the clock source selected by each external
clock.
Step 14 Run the display clock ssm-config command to view the SSM quality levels of clock sources.
----End
11.8 Configuration Examples
This section provides several configuration examples of Ethernet clock syntonization.
11.8.1 Example for Selecting the Clock Source Based on the Priority
Networking Requirements
On a ring network, the clock of a Switch is configured as the primary reference clock. You can
set the priorities of clock sources so that the clock source is selected based on priorities. In
addition, timing loops must be prevented. A timing loop occurs when the device where the
primary reference clock is located receives clock signals from a clock source with higher priority
and the clock source of the primary reference clock is re-selected.
As shown in Figure 11-1, three Switches form a ring network. The clock of Switch A is the
primary reference clock. In this example, the primary reference clock on the ring network is
generated by the local oscillator. In the actual networking, the primary reference clock may be
obtained from the BITS interface of Switch A. The Switches obtain clock signals from the LPUs
and select clock sources based on priorities. Normally, the clock syntonization direction is shown
by the red arrows. If the clock signal fails to be transmitted in this direction, the Switches can
quickly change the clock syntonization direction, as shown by the blue arrows. Switch A is
always the reference clock source.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
186
Figure 11-1 Networking diagram of clock syntonization
GE 2/0/0
G
E

5
/
0
/
3
GE 2/0/0
G
E

2
/
0
/
3
G
E

5
/
0
/
7
G
E

2
/
0
/
7
SwitchA
SwitchC
SwitchB
Normal clock synchronization
direction
Clock synchronization direction after signal
transmission between SwitchA and SwitchB fails.
BITS

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure the BITS0 interface of Switch A to use the BITS clock as the input primary
reference clock.
2. Set the mode of clock source selection on Switch B and Switch C. Make sure that the priority
of the clock signals sent from the left side of the frame is higher than that of the clock
signals sent from the right side of the frame on each Switch.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Mode of clock source selection
l Priorities of clock sources
Procedure
Step 1 Verify that the clock of Switch A is the primary reference clock.
# Set the priority of the BITS0 clock on Switch A to 1.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchA
[SwitchA] clock priority 1 source 1 system
[SwitchA] display clock priority
Reference Clock Source System bits0 bits1
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Inner Clock 254 - -
1 BITS0 1 - -
2 BITS1 255 - -
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
187
3 Peer Board BITS0 255 - -
4 Peer Board BITS1 255 - -
5 Left Frame Clock 255 255 255
6 Right Frame Clock 255 255 255
7 FSU 255 255 255
8 Peer Board FSU 255 255 255
9 System Clock - 254 254
# Verify that the SSM quality level is not used in clock source selection.
[SwitchA] display clock mode
QL-Enable : No.
Freq-Check : No.
Retrieve : Yes.
Hold Type : Hold 24 hours.
Run Mode : Free.
Bits0 : Locked.
Bits1 : Locked.
System mode: Auto select clock source 1: BITS0.
Bits0 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Bits1 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Clock time : Free-run
# Verify that the system clock selects the BITS0 clock as the clock source and that the system
clock sends the clock signal to the LPUs as the output clock signal.
[SwitchA] display clock selection
Type Clock Source Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
system 1. BITS0
bits0 9. System Clock
bits1 9. System Clock
Step 2 Set the mode of clock source selection on Switch B.
# On Switch B, set the priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 5/0/7 sends from the right
side of the frame to 10, and set priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 5/0/3 sends from
the right side of the frame to 20. Retain the default WTR time. Set the priority of the clock signal
sent from the right side of the frame to 6.
NOTE
If you want to see the clock source switching result during debugging, set the WTR time to 0.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchB
[SwitchB] interface GigabitEthernet 5/0/7
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/7] clock right-frame 10
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/7] quit
[SwitchB] interface GigabitEthernet 5/0/3
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/3] clock right-frame 20
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/3] quit
[SwitchB] clock priority 6 source 6 system
[SwitchB] quit
# View information about the clock sources sent from the right side of the frame. You can see
that the clock source of GigabitEthernet 5/0/7 is sent to the clock board, and the clock
syntonization direction is shown by the red arrows in Figure 11-1.
[SwitchB] display clock right-frame
Interface Priority Clock Signal Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet5/0/3 20 N
GigabitEthernet5/0/7 10 Y
# View the clock information on Switch B, and you can see that the inner clock, Right Frame
Clock, and system clock provide clock signals normally.
[SwitchB] display clock source
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
188
Reference Clock Source Signal Fail S1 Byte ID SSM
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Inner Clock No -- - SEC
1 BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
2 BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
3 Peer Board BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
4 Peer Board BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
5 Left Frame Clock Yes -- - DNU
6 Right Frame Clock No 0f - DNU
7 FSU Yes -- - DNU
8 Peer Board FSU Yes -- - DNU
9 System Clock No -- - SEC
# Verify that the SSM quality level is not used in clock source selection.
[SwitchB] display clock mode
QL-Enable : No.
Freq-Check : No.
Retrieve : Yes.
Hold Type : Hold 24 hours.
Run Mode : Trace.(SyncOK, Locked)
Bits0 : Locked.
Bits1 : Locked.
System mode: Auto select clock source 6: Right Frame Clock.
Bits0 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Bits1 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Clock time : Free-run
# Verify that the system clock selects the clock source sent from the right side of the frame as
the clock source and that the system clock sends the clock signal to the LPUs as the output clock
signal.
[SwitchB] display clock selection
Type Clock Source Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
system 6. Right Frame Clock
bits0 9. System Clock
bits1 9. System Clock
Step 3 Set the mode of clock source selection on Switch C.
# On Switch C, set the priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 2/0/3 sends from the left
side of the frame to 30, and set priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 2/0/0 sends from
the left side of the frame to 40. Retain the default WTR time. Set the priority of the clock signal
sent from the left side of the frame to 5.
NOTE
If you want to see the clock source switching result during debugging, set the WTR time to 0.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchC
[SwitchC] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/3
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/3] clock left-frame 30
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/3] quit
[SwitchC] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] clock left-frame 40
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[SwitchC] clock priority 5 source 5 system
[SwitchC] quit
# View information about the clock sources sent from the left side of the frame. You can see
that the clock source of GigabitEthernet 2/0/3 is sent to the clock board, and the clock
syntonization direction is shown by the red arrows in Figure 11-1.
[SwitchB] display clock left-frame
Interface Priority Clock Signal Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet2/0/0 40 N
GigabitEthernet2/0/3 30 Y
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
189
# View the clock information on Switch C. You can see that the inner clock, Left Frame Clock,
and system clock provide clock signals normally.
[SwitchC] display clock source
Reference Clock Source Signal Fail S1 Byte ID SSM
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Inner Clock No -- - SEC
1 BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
2 BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
3 Peer Board BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
4 Peer Board BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
5 Left Frame Clock No 0f - DNU
6 Right Frame Clock Yes -- - DNU
7 FSU Yes -- - DNU
8 Peer Board FSU Yes -- - DNU
9 System Clock No -- - SEC
# Verify that the SSM quality level is not used in clock source selection.
[SwitchC] display clock mode
QL-Enable : No.
Freq-Check : No.
Retrieve : Yes.
Hold Type : Hold 24 hours.
Run Mode : Trace.(SyncOK, Locked)
Bits0 : Locked.
Bits1 : Locked.
System mode: Auto select clock source 5: Left Frame Clock.
Bits0 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Bits1 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Clock time : Free-run
# Verify that the system clock selects the clock source sent from the left side of the frame as the
clock source and that the system clock sends the clock signal to the LPUs as the output clock
signal.
[SwitchC] display clock selection
Type Clock Source Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
system 5. Left Frame Clock
bits0 9. System Clock
bits1 9. System Clock
Step 4 Verify the configuration.
The commands used to verify the configuration result are included in the preceding steps.
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of Switch A
#
sysname SwitchA
#
clock priority 1 source 1 system
#
l Configuration file of Switch B
#
sysname SwitchB
#
clock priority 6 source 6 system
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/3
clock right-frame 20
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
190
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/7
clock right-frame 10
#
l Configuration file of Switch C
#
sysname SwitchC
#
clock priority 5 source 5 system
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
clock left-frame 40
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/3
clock left-frame 30
#
11.8.2 Example for Selecting the Clock Source Based on the SSM
Quality Level
Networking Requirements
On a ring network, the clock of a Switch is configured as the primary reference clock. You can
set the priorities of clock sources so that so that the clock source is selected based on the SSM
quality level. Timing loops must be prevented.
As shown in Figure 11-2, three S9306s form a ring network. The clock of Switch A is the primary
reference clock. In this example, the primary reference clock on the ring network is generated
by the local oscillator. In actual networking, the primary reference clock may be obtained from
the BITS interface of Switch A. The Switches obtain clock signals from the LPUs and select the
clock source based on the SSM quality level. The normal clock syntonization direction is shown
by the red arrows. If the clock signal fails to be transmitted in this direction, the Switches can
quickly change the clock syntonization direction, as shown by the blue arrows.
Figure 11-2 Networking diagram of clock syntonization
GE 2/0/0
G
E

5
/
0
/
3
GE 2/0/0
G
E

2
/
0
/
3
G
E

5
/
0
/
7
G
E

2
/
0
/
7
SwitchA
SwitchC
SwitchB
Normal clock synchronization
direction
Clock synchronization direction after signal
transmission between SwitchA and SwitchB fails.
BITS

Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
191
Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure the BITS0 interface of Switch A to use the BITS clock as the input primary
reference clock. (The SSM quality level of the BITS0 clock is PRC.)
2. Set the mode of clock source selection on Switch A, Switch B and Switch C.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Mode of clock source selection
l Priorities of clock sources
Procedure
Step 1 Verify that the clock of Switch A is the primary reference clock and enable the SSM quality
level to be used in clock source selection.
# On Switch A, enable the SSM quality level to be used in clock source selection and set the
priority of the BITS0 clock to 1.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname Switch-A
[SwitchA] clock ql-enable
[SwitchA] clock priority 1 source 1 system
# View the clock information on Switch A, and you can see that the inner clock and system clock
provide clock signals normally.
[SwitchA] display clock priority
Reference Clock Source System bits0 bits1
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Inner Clock 254 - -
1 BITS0 1 - -
2 BITS1 255 - -
3 Peer Board BITS0 255 - -
4 Peer Board BITS1 255 - -
5 Left Frame Clock 255 255 255
6 Right Frame Clock 255 255 255
7 FSU 255 255 255
8 Peer Board FSU 255 255 255
9 System Clock - 254 254
# Verify that the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection.
[SwitchA] display clock mode
QL-Enable : Yes.
Freq-Check : No.
Retrieve : Yes.
Hold Type : Hold 24 hours.
Run Mode : Free.
Bits0 : Locked.
Bits1 : Locked.
System mode: Auto select clock source 1: BITS0.
Bits0 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Bits1 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Clock time : Free-run
# Verify that the system clock selects the BITS0 clock as the clock source and that the system
clock sends clock signal to the LPUs as the output clock signal.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
192
[SwitchA] display clock selection
Type Clock Source Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
system 1. BITS0
bits0 9. System Clock
bits1 9. System Clock
Step 2 Set the mode of clock source selection on Switch B.
# On Switch B, set the priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 5/0/7 sends from the right
side of the frame to 10, and set priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 5/0/3 sends from
the right side of the frame to 20. Retain the default WTR time. Set the priority of the clock signal
sent from the right side of the frame to 6.
NOTE
If you want to see the clock source switching result during debugging, set the WTR time to 0.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchB
[SwitchB] clock ql-enable
[SwitchB] interface GigabitEthernet 5/0/7
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/7] clock right-frame 10
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/7] quit
[SwitchB] interface GigabitEthernet 5/0/3
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/3] clock right-frame 20
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/3] quit
[SwitchB] clock priority 6 source 6 system
[SwitchB] quit
# View information about the clock sources sent from the right side of the frame. You can see
that the clock source of GigabitEthernet 5/0/7 is sent to the clock board, and the clock
syntonization direction is shown by the red arrows in Figure 11-2.
[SwitchB] display clock right-frame
Interface Priority Clock Signal Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet5/0/3 20 N
GigabitEthernet5/0/7 10 Y
# View the clock information on Switch B, and you can see that the inner clock, Right Frame
Clock, and system clock provide clock signals normally.
[SwitchB] display clock source
Reference Clock Source Signal Fail S1 Byte ID SSM
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Inner Clock No -- - SEC
1 BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
2 BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
3 Peer Board BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
4 Peer Board BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
5 Left Frame Clock Yes -- - DNU
6 Right Frame Clock No 02 - PRC
7 FSU Yes -- - DNU
8 Peer Board FSU Yes -- - DNU
9 System Clock No -- - PRC
# Verify that the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection.
[SwitchB] display clock mode
QL-Enable : Yes.
Freq-Check : No.
Retrieve : Yes.
Hold Type : Hold 24 hours.
Run Mode : Trace.(SyncOK, Locked)
Bits0 : Locked.
Bits1 : Locked.
System mode: Auto select clock source 6: Right Frame Clock.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
193
Bits0 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Bits1 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Clock time : Free-run
# Ensure that the system clock selects the clock source sent from the right side of the frame as
the clock source and that the system clock sends clock signal to the LPUs as the output clock
signal.
[SwitchB] display clock selection
Type Clock Source Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
system 6. Right Frame Clock
bits0 9. System Clock
bits1 9. System Clock
Step 3 Set the mode of clock source selection on Switch C.
# On Switch C, set the priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 2/0/3 sends from the left
side of the frame to 30, and set priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 2/0/0 sends from
the left side of the frame to 40. Retain the default WTR time. Set the priority of the clock signal
sent from the left side of the frame to 5.
NOTE
If you want to see the clock source switching result during debugging, set the WTR time to 0.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchC
[SwitchC] clock ql-enable
[SwitchC] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/3
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/3] clock left-frame 30
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/3] quit
[SwitchC] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] clock left-frame 40
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[SwitchC] clock priority 5 source 5 system
[SwitchC] quit
# View information about the clock sources sent from the left side of the frame. You can see
that the clock source of GigabitEthernet 2/0/3 is sent to the clock board, and the clock
syntonization direction is shown by the red arrows in Figure 11-2.
[SwitchC] display clock left-frame
Interface Priority Clock Signal Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet2/0/0 40 N
GigabitEthernet2/0/3 30 Y
# View the clock information on Switch C, and you can see that the inner clock, Left Frame
Clock, and system clock provide clock signals normally.
[SwitchC] display clock source
Reference Clock Source Signal Fail S1 Byte ID SSM
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Inner Clock No -- - SEC
1 BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
2 BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
3 Peer Board BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
4 Peer Board BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
5 Left Frame Clock No 02 - PRC
6 Right Frame Clock Yes -- - DNU
7 FSU Yes -- - DNU
8 Peer Board FSU Yes -- - DNU
9 System Clock No -- - PRC
# Verify that the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection.
[SwitchC] display clock mode
QL-Enable : Yes.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
194
Freq-Check : No.
Retrieve : Yes.
Hold Type : Hold 24 hours.
Run Mode : Trace.(SyncOK, Locked)
Bits0 : Locked.
Bits1 : Locked.
System mode: Auto select clock source 5: Left Frame Clock.
Bits0 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Bits1 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Clock time : Free-run
# Ensure that the system clock selects the clock source sent from the left side of the frame as the
clock source and that the system clock sends clock signal to the LPUs as the output clock signal.
[SwitchC] display clock selection
Type Clock Source Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
system 5. Left Frame Clock
bits0 9. System Clock
bits1 9. System Clock
Step 4 Verify the configuration.
The commands used to verify the configuration result are included in the preceding steps.
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of Switch A
#
sysname SwitchA
#
clock ql-enable
clock priority 1 source 1 system
#
l Configuration file of Switch B
#
sysname SwitchB
#
clock ql-enable
clock priority 6 source 6 system
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/3
clock right-frame 20
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/7
clock right-frame 10
#
l Configuration file of Switch C
#
sysname SwitchC
#
clock ql-enable
clock priority 5 source 5 system
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
clock left-frame 40
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/3
clock left-frame 30
#
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
195
11.8.3 Example for Selecting the Clock Source Based on the SSM
Quality Level in Extended Mode
Networking Requirements
If the clock signal sent from the local device is sent back to the local device directly or through
the network, a timing loop occurs. In extended SSM mode, you can set IDs for the circuit or
external clock sources to prevent timing loops.
As shown in Figure 11-3, three S9306s form a ring network. Switch C is connected to the primary
clock. The Switches synchronize their clocks with the primary clock. Timing loops must be
prevented through configuration.
Figure 11-3 Networking diagram of clock syntonization
GE 2/0/0
G
E

5
/
0
/
3
GE 2/0/0
G
E

2
/
0
/
3
G
E

5
/
0
/
7
G
E

2
/
0
/
7
SwitchA
SwitchC
SwitchB
Normal clock synchronization
direction
Clock synchronization direction after signal
transmission between SwitchA and SwitchB fails.
BITS

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Configure the primary clock as the input clock source of Switch A and set the ID of the
reference clock source.
2. Set the mode of clock source selection on Switch B and Switch C.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Mode of clock source selection
l Priorities of clock sources
l ID of the inner clock.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
196
Procedure
Step 1 On Switch A, enable the extended SSM mode and set the ID of the BITS clock source.
# Enable the extended SSM mode. Set the ID of the BITS0 clock to 1 and the priority of the
BITS0 clock to 1.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchA
[SwitchA] clock ql-enable extend
[SwitchA] clock id 1 source 1
[SwitchA] clock priority 1 source 1 system
# View the clock information on Switch A, and you can see that the inner clock and system clock
provide clock signals normally.
[SwitchA] display clock source
Reference Clock Source Signal Fail S1 Byte ID SSM
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Inner Clock No -- - SEC
1 BITS0 No -- 1 PRC
2 BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
3 Peer Board BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
4 Peer Board BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
5 Left Frame Clock Yes -- - DNU
6 Right Frame Clock Yes -- - DNU
7 FSU Yes -- - DNU
8 Peer Board FSU Yes -- - DNU
9 System Clock No -- - PRC
# Verify that the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection.
[SwitchA] display clock mode
QL-Enable : Yes (Extend Mode).
Freq-Check : No.
Retrieve : Yes.
Hold Type : Hold 24 hours.
Run Mode : Free.
Bits0 : Locked.
Bits1 : Locked.
System mode: Auto select clock source 1: BITS0.
Bits0 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Bits1 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Clock time : Free-run
# Verify that the system clock selects the inner clock as the clock source and that the system
clock sends the clock signal to the LPUs as the output clock signal.
[SwitchA] display clock selection
Type Clock Source Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
system 1. BITS0
bits0 9. System Clock
bits1 9. System Clock
Step 2 Set the mode of clock source selection on Switch B.
# On Switch B, set the priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 5/0/7 sends from the right
side of the frame to 10, and set priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 5/0/3 sends from
the right side of the frame to 20. Retain the default WTR time. Set the priority of the clock signal
sent from the right side of the frame to 6.
NOTE
If you want to see the clock source switching result during debugging, set the WTR time to 0.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchB
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
197
[SwitchB] clock ql-enable extend
[SwitchB] interface GigabitEthernet 5/0/7
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/7] clock right-frame 10
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/7] quit
[SwitchB] interface GigabitEthernet 5/0/3
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/3] clock right-frame 20
[SwitchB-GigabitEthernet5/0/3] quit
[SwitchB] clock priority 6 source 6 system
[SwitchB] quit
# View information about the clock sources sent from the right side of the frame. You can see
that the clock source of GigabitEthernet 5/0/7 is sent to the clock board, and the clock
syntonization direction is shown by the red arrows in Figure 11-3.
[SwitchB] display clock right-frame
Interface Priority Clock Signal Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet5/0/3 20 N
GigabitEthernet5/0/7 10 Y
# View the clock information on Switch B, and you can see that the inner clock, Right Frame
Clock, and system clock provide clock signals normally.
[SwitchB] display clock priority
Reference Clock Source System bits0 bits1
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Inner Clock 254 - -
1 BITS0 1 - -
2 BITS1 255 - -
3 Peer Board BITS0 255 - -
4 Peer Board BITS1 255 - -
5 Left Frame Clock 255 255 255
6 Right Frame Clock 255 255 255
7 FSU 255 255 255
8 Peer Board FSU 255 255 255
9 System Clock - 254 254
# Verify that the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection.
[SwitchB] display clock mode
QL-Enable : Yes (Extend Mode).
Freq-Check : No.
Retrieve : Yes.
Hold Type : Hold 24 hours.
Run Mode : Trace.(SyncOK, Locked)
Bits0 : Locked.
Bits1 : Locked.
System mode: Auto select clock source 6: Right Frame Clock.
Bits0 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Bits1 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Clock time : Free-run
# Ensure that the system clock selects the clock source sent from the right side of the frame as
the clock source and that the system clock sends clock signal to the LPUs as the output clock
signal.
[SwitchB] display clock selection
Type Clock Source Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
system 6. Right Frame Clock
bits0 9. System Clock
bits1 9. System Clock
Step 3 Set the mode of clock source selection on Switch C.
# On Switch C, set the priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 2/0/3 sends from the left
side of the frame to 30, and set priority of the clock signal that GigabitEthernet 2/0/0 sends from
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
198
the left side of the frame to 40. Retain the default WTR time. Set the priority of the clock signal
sent from the left side of the frame to 5.
NOTE
If you want to see the clock source switching result during debugging, set the WTR time to 0.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] sysname SwitchC
[SwitchC] clock ql-enable extend
[SwitchC] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/3
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/3] clock left-frame 30
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/3] quit
[SwitchC] interface GigabitEthernet 2/0/0
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] clock left-frame 40
[SwitchC-GigabitEthernet2/0/0] quit
[SwitchC] clock priority 5 source 6 system
[SwitchC] quit
# View information about the clock sources sent from the left side of the frame. You can see
that the clock source of GigabitEthernet 2/0/3 is sent to the clock board, and the clock
syntonization direction is shown by the red arrows in Figure 11-3.
[SwitchC] display clock left-frame
Interface Priority Clock Signal Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet2/0/0 40 N
GigabitEthernet2/0/3 30 Y
# View the clock information on Switch C, and you can see that the inner clock, Left Frame
Clock, and system clock provide clock signals normally.
[SwitchC] display clock source
Reference Clock Source Signal Fail S1 Byte ID SSM
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Inner Clock No -- - SEC
1 BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
2 BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
3 Peer Board BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
4 Peer Board BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
5 Left Frame Clock No 12 - PRC
6 Right Frame Clock Yes -- - DNU
7 FSU Yes -- - DNU
8 Peer Board FSU Yes -- - DNU
9 System Clock No -- - PRC
# Verify that the SSM quality level is used in clock source selection.
[SwitchC] display clock mode
QL-Enable : Yes (Extend Mode).
Freq-Check : No.
Retrieve : Yes.
Hold Type : Hold 24 hours.
Run Mode : Trace.(SyncOK, Locked)
Bits0 : Locked.
Bits1 : Locked.
System mode: Auto select clock source 5: Left Frame Clock.
Bits0 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Bits1 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Clock time : Free-run
# Ensure that the system clock selects the clock source sent from the left side of the frame as the
clock source and that the system clock sends clock signal to the LPUs as the output clock signal.
[SwitchC] display clock selection
Type Clock Source Selected
---------------------------------------------------------------------
system 5. Left Frame Clock
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
199
bits0 9. System Clock
bits1 9. System Clock
Step 4 Verify the configuration.
The commands used to verify the configuration result are included in the preceding steps.
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of Switch A
#
sysname SwitchA
#
clock ql-enable extend
clock id 1 source 0
clock ssm-config prc source 0
#
interface Ethernet0/0/0
ip address 10.164.29.31 255.255.255.0
undo portswitch
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/2
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/3
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/4
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/5
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/6
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/7
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/8
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/9
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/10
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/11
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/12
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/13
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/14
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/15
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/16
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/17
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/18
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/19
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/20
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/21
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/22
#
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
200
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/23
#
l Configuration file of Switch B
#
sysname SwitchB
#
clock ql-enable extend
clock priority 6 source 6 system
#
interface Ethernet0/0/0
ip address 10.164.29.32 255.255.255.0
undo portswitch
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/0
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/1
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/2
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/3
clock right-frame 20
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/4
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/5
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/6
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/7
clock right-frame 10
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/8
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/9
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/10
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/11
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/12
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/13
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/14
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/15
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/16
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/17
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/18
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/19
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/20
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/21
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/22
#
interface GigabitEthernet5/0/23
#
l Configuration file of Switch C
#
sysname SwitchC
#
clock ql-enable extend
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
201
clock priority 5 source 5 system
#
interface Ethernet0/0/0
ip address 10.164.29.33 255.255.255.0
undo portswitch
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/0
clock left-frame 40
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/1
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/2
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/3
clock left-frame 30
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/4
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/5
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/6
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/7
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/8
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/9
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/10
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/11
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/12
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/13
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/14
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/15
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/16
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/17
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/18
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/19
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/20
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/21
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/22
#
interface GigabitEthernet2/0/23
#
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 11 Ethernet Clock Syntonization Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
202
12 PTP Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the Precision Time Protocol (PTP) configuration of the S9300.
12.1 PTP Overview
12.2 PTP Feature Supported by the S9300
12.3 Configuring PTP for an OC
12.4 Configuring PTP for a BC
12.5 Configuring PTP for a TC
12.6 Configuring PTP for a TCandBC
12.7 Configuring the PTP Clock Source
12.8 Maintaining PTP
12.9 Configuration Examples
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
203
12.1 PTP Overview
Definition of synchronization
In a modern communications network, the proper functioning of most telecommunications
services requires that the frequency offset or time difference between devices be kept in a
reasonable range. This is the network's requirement for clock synchronization. Network clock
synchronization consists of phase synchronization and frequency synchronization.
l Frequency Synchronization
Frequency synchronization refers to strict relationship between signals based on a constant
frequency offset or phase offset, in which signals are sent or received at a rate in an epoch.
In this manner, all devices in the communications network operate at the same rate. That
is, the difference of phases between signals is a constant value.
l Phase Synchronization
Phase synchronization refers to consistency of both frequencies and phases between
signals. That is, the phase offset between signals is always 0.
Figure 12-1 Schematic diagram of phase synchronization and frequency synchronization
Phase synchronization
Watch A
Watch B
Frequency synchronization
Watch A
Watch B
Figure 12-1shows the difference between phase synchronization and frequency
synchronization. In phase synchronization, Watch A and Watch B always keep the same time,
whereas in frequency synchronization, Watch A and Watch B keep different time, but the time
difference between the two watches is a constant value, for example, six hours.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
204
Usually, phase synchronization is also called time synchronization; frequency synchronization
is also known as clock synchronization. All of those terms are used in the following sections
and you need to pay attention to the differences between them.
Background
With the evolution towards IP network, devices on the wireless bearer network need to ensure
high-accurate clock synchronization. To achieve clock synchronization between base stations
in an IP RAN, you need to ensure that clock frequencies between base stations are within a
certain precision. Call dropping, otherwise, may occur during handoff. In certain wireless
communications systems, phase synchronization is required in addition to frequency
synchronization.
Table 12-1 shows different requirements for network clock synchronization.
Table 12-1 Different requirements for network clock synchronization in wireless
communications
Wireless
Communications
Systems
Clock Frequency
Accuracy Clock
Phase Synchronization
Requirement
GSM 0.05 ppm N/A
WCDMA 0.05 ppm N/A
TD-SCDMA 0.05 ppm 3 us
CDMA2000 0.05 ppm 3 us
WiMax FDD 0.05 ppm NA
WiMax TDD 0.05 ppm 1 us
LTE 0.05 ppm In favor of phase
synchronization

The requirement for clock synchronization on different base stations of different standards can
be met through various methods, such as physical clocks (such as the building integrated timing
supply system (BITS) clock, WAN clock, and synchronous Ethernet clock) and recovery clocks
by packets (such as Network Time Protocol and 1588v2 clock). Traditionally, base stations
directly access the global positioning system (GPS) to meet the requirement for time
synchronization. Packet-based time synchronization cannot meet the requirement of base
stations. Time synchronization can reach sub-second precision through the Network Time
Protocol (NTP) and sub-millisecond precision through 1588v1. With the assistance of hardware,
1588v2 can provide the time synchronization of sub-micro second precision. This meets the
requirement of wireless networks for time synchronization.
Compared with GPS, operation and maintenance cost of 1588v2 is lower (do not need to deploy
GPS at each base station). In addition, 1588v2 operates independent of the GPS, which is of
strategic significance.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
205
Concepts of 1588v2
PTP (Precision Time Protocol) is short for 1588, which is defined by the Institute of Electrical
and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). IEEE 1588 is a standard for Precision Clock Synchronization
Protocol For Networked Measurement and Control Systems. IEEE 1588v2 is defined as a time
synchronization protocol. IEEE 1588v2 ensures high-precision time synchronization between
devices, and now is also used in clock synchronization between devices.
A physical network can be logically divided into multiple clock domains. In each clock domain,
there is synchronized time, with which all devices in the domain are synchronized. The
synchronized time of one clock domain is independent of that of another clock domain.
Each node on a time synchronization network is called a clock. 1588v2 defines the following
types of clocks:
l Ordinary clock
An ordinary clock (OC) has only one 1588v2 port, through which the local clock is
synchronized with an upstream 1588-aware node or distributes time signals to downstream
1588-aware nodes.
l Boundary clock
A boundary clock (BC) has multiple 1588v2 ports. One port is synchronized with an
upstream 1588-aware node and the others distribute time signals to downstream 1588-
aware nodes.
In the case that a device obtains the standard time through an external non-1588v2 port
from a BITS device and distributes the time to downstream nodes through two 1588v2
ports. As the device has more than one 1588v2 port, the device is called a BC.
l Transparent clock
Distinct from BC and OC that need to be synchronized with other clocks, TC does not need
to be synchronized with other clocks. A TC has multiple 1588v2 ports, through which
1588v2 packets are forwarded. In addition, the TC corrects forwarding delays for these
1588v2 packets and is not synchronized with other clocks through any port.
TC are classified into end-to-end (E2E) TC and peer-to-peer (P2P) TC.
End-to-end transparent clock (E2ETC): directly forwards all 1588v2 packets on the
network, and participates in the calculation of the delay of the entire link.
Peer-to-peer transparent clock (P2PTC): directly forwards Sync and Announce packets
on the network, terminates the remaining 1588v2 packets, and participates in calculating
the delay of each segment of the entire link.
Besides the three basic types of the clock, the S9300 supports the following compound types of
clocks:
l TCOC: carries the characteristics of both a TC and an OC. A TCOC provides multiple ports
for communicating with the 1588v2 network. Among those ports, one is OC and the others
are TC. A TCOC implements 1588v2 frequency synchronization instead of time
synchronization.
l TCandBC: carries the characteristics of both TC and BC. A TCandBC provides multiple
ports for communicating with the 1588v2 network. Among those ports, some are TC and
the others are BC. A TCandBC implements 1588v2 frequency synchronization and time
synchronization. The domain value of BC ports is the same as the 1588v2 domain value
configured in the system view.
In the entire 1588v2 system, all clocks are organized according to the master-slave
synchronization hierarchy, with the grandmaster clock at the top of the hierarchy. Clock
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
206
synchronization is implemented through the exchange of 1588v2 packets. The slave clock
calculates its offset and delay comparing with the master clock according to the timestamp
information carried in the 1588v2 packet and then synchronizes its local clock to the master
clock.
A 1588v2 packet carries information about clock and time. As shown in Figure 12-2, the 1588v2
device reads and writes the timestamp carried in the 1588v2 packet on the link layer to calculate
the delay of each link segment. Compared with the Network Time Protocol (NTP), 1588v2
ensures a higher precision.
Figure 12-2 Timestamping in the 1588v2 packet
Timestamping
PTP Aplication
MA
C
PH
Y
Master Clock
Slave Clock
PTP Packet
PTP Aplication
MA
C
PH
Y
Timestamping
IP
IP

Applications of 1588v2
As shown in Figure 12-3, OC encapsulates clock information with high accuracy obtained
through the Global Positioning System (GPS) into a 1588v2 packet, and provides the clock
information for the bearer network through the 1588v2 packet. As the core device of the bearer
network, TC transparently transmits the clock information provided by the OC to the entire
bearer network. After that, the edge devices of the bearer network function as BC and provide
the high-accurate clock information obtained through the 1588v2 packet to wireless access
devices, such as NodeB and RNC.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
207
Figure 12-3 Application of 1588v2 on a bearer network
GPS
PTP Packet
BC
TC
TC TC
BC BC
OC
NodeB NodeB
RNC
BC
NodeB
NodeB
TC
BITS

12.2 PTP Feature Supported by the S9300
NOTE
To use the PTP feature, the CKM-clock board and G24CEAS must be installed on the S9300.
Seven 1588v2 Devices Supported by the S9300
The S9300 supports the following 1588v2 device types:
l OC: Ordinary clock
l BC: Boundary clock
l E2ETC: End-to-end transparent clock
l P2PTC: Peer-to-peer transparent clock
l TCandBC: Transparent clock and boundary clock
l E2ETCOC: End-to-end transparent clock and ordinary clock
l P2PTCOC: Peer-to-peer transparent clock and ordinary clock
Four 1588v2 Packet Encapsulation Modes Supported by the S9300
The S9300 supports MAC encapsulation and UDP encapsulation modes.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
208
l In MAC encapsulation mode, the VLAN ID carried in 1588v2 packets is optional. The
MAC encapsulation is classified into two types:
Unicast encapsulation
Multicast encapsulation
l In UDP encapsulation mode, the VLAN ID carried in 1588v2 packets is optional. The UDP
encapsulation is classified into two types:
Unicast encapsulation
Multicast encapsulation
Before configuring encapsulation modes for 1588v2 packets, check the link type for 1588v2
packet transmission:
l The Layer 2 link adopts the MAC encapsulation mode for 1588v2 packets.
l The Layer 3 link adopts the UDP encapsulation mode for 1588v2 packets.
Two Delay Measurement Mechanisms Supported by the S9300
The S9300 supports the following link delay measurement mechanisms configured for 1588v2:
l Delay: Delay request-response mechanism
l PDelay: Peer delay mechanism
Timestamp Modes Supported by the S9300
When packets are used for clock synchronization, the S9300 supports the following modes of
the timestamp carried in packets:
l One-step clock mode: In one-step clock mode, Sync messages in Delay mode and
PDelay_Resp messages in PDelay mode are stamped with the time when they are sent.
l Two-step clock mode: In two-step clock mode, Sync messages in Delay mode and
PDelay_Resp messages in PDelay mode only record the time when they are generated, but
carry no timestamps. The timestamps are carried in subsequent messages, that is,
Follow_Up or PDelay_Resp_Follow_Up messages.
BMC Algorithm Supported by the S9300
The S9300 supports the BMC algorithm.
l Best master clock (BMC)
With the BMC algorithm, 1588v2 devices can dynamically select the best master clock on
the network to ensure clock accuracy of devices.
By default, the S9300 synchronizes the time by obtaining frequency signals through Ethernet
synchronization and clock signals through 1588v2. When you use PTP devices, it is
recommended that frequency signals and clock signals be obtained through 1588v2.
PTP Constraints
l When the S9300 are installed with two MPUs, both the active MPU and slave MPU need
to be configured with the clock boards. If the system needs to synchronize the time by
receiving the external time signal through the BITS interface, the same BITS interface of
the two MPUs (for example, BITS0 interface) must receive the same external time signal.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
209
If the S9300 is installed with only one MPU, only the BITS interface of the active MPU
needs to receive the external time signal.
l The transmission of clock signals is bidirectional, and the transmission of time signals is
unidirectional. The straight-through cable transmits time signals and the crossover cable
transmits clock signals.
Networking Requirements of PTP
All the devices on the 1588v2 synchronization channel must support the 1588v2 function.
In the networking, you should prevent an interface from receiving two types of Announce
packets.
NOTE
The Announce packet contains the clock attributes of the peer device, which are used to set up clock master/
slave relationship between the connected devices.
On the entire 1588v2 network, all the clocks are organized as the master clocks and slave clocks.
This requires that:
l The virtual clock ID of the 1588v2 device must be unique; otherwise, two master devices
are available on a synchronization network. By default, the virtual clock ID is an extension
of the MAC address. The ptp virtual-clock-id command can be used to change the virtual
clock ID.
l On the devices where time synchronization is performed, the interfaces sending and
receiving 1588v2 packets must use the same delay measurement mechanism; otherwise,
the time precision is inaccurate.
l The devices where time synchronization is performed through 1588v2 packets must be in
the same clock domain; otherwise, the devices cannot set up the time synchronization
relationship.
l The encapsulation modes of 1588v2 packets sent from the interfaces of devices where time
synchronization is performed must be the same; otherwise, the devices cannot interwork.
l If the clock stratum of the slave clock is high, the 1588v2 interface of the device cannot
enter the slave state. As a result, the device cannot synchronize with the master clock.
12.3 Configuring PTP for an OC
12.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
As shown in Figure 12-4, when two devices transmit wireless data on the IP bearer network, a
low delay transmission of real-time radio services should be guaranteed. The two devices serve
as OC to transmit time information through 1588v2 packets, which ensures clock
synchronization between devices. OC can provide a high-accurate time source for wireless
devices through the Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS) system.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
210
Figure 12-4 Configuring 1588v2 on OC
OC1
OC2
Master Slave BITS

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring 1588v2 on OC, complete the following tasks:
l Setting parameters of the link layer protocol for the interfaces and ensuring that the status
of the link layer protocol on the interfaces is Up
l Ensuring that the OC1 has correctly imported the clock and time signals from the BITS
Data Preparation
To configure 1588v2 on OC, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number and IP address of each interface
2 (Optional) IDs of 1588v2 domains to which devices belong
3 (Optional) Asymmetric correction value of the 1588v2 packet
4 (Optional) Interval for sending Announce packets and the timeout period for
receiving Announce packets
5 (Optional) Interval for sending Sync packets
6 (Optional) Minimum interval for sending Delay packets
7 (Optional) Destination MAC address, source IP address, destination IP address,
DSCP value, VLAN ID, and priority corresponding to the VLAN encapsulated into
the 1588v2 packet

12.3.2 Configuring PTP Globally
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run
ptp enable
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
211
1588v2 is enabled.
Step 3 Run:
ptp device-type oc
The device type is configured as OC.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
ptp slaveonly
The OC is configured to work in slave-only mode.
When a device functioning as OC synchronizes its clock with other clocks, you can configure
the device to work in "slave-only" mode. After the OC is configured to work in "slave-only"
mode, interfaces of the OC are in the slave state, which means that the OC can only function as
a slave clock to receive clock signals from other clocks rather than a master clock to provide
clock signals for other clocks.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
ptp domain domain-value
The domain to which the 1588v2 interface belongs is configured.
NOTE
Clocks that need to be synchronized through 1588v2 packets must belong to the same 1588v2 clock domain.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
ptp virtual-clock-id clock-id-value
The virtual clock ID of the OC is set.
Generally, the system generates the clock ID according to the MAC address of the device. The
virtual clock ID of the device that is set manually helps identify the 1588v2 device.
NOTE
Before you run the ptp virtual-clock-id command, ensure that the virtual clock ID you set is unique in the entire
1588v2 clock domain.
----End
12.3.3 Configuring PTP for an Interface
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
ptp delay-mechanism { delay | pdelay }
A delay measurement mechanism is configured for the device, which can be either of the
following:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
212
l Delay mode:
A delay request-response mechanism, in which information about the clock and time is
calculated according to the delay of the entire link between the master clock and slave clock.
l PDelay mode:
A peer delay mechanism, in which information about the time and clock is calculated
according to the delay of each segment of the link between the master clock and slave clock.
NOTE
Different delay measurement mechanisms cannot replace each other. Therefore, delay measurement
mechanisms configured on 1588v2 interfaces on the same link segment must be identical.
Step 4 Run:
ptp enable
1588v2 is enabled on the interface.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-drop enable
The interface of the 1588v2 device is configured to discard the received Announce packets.
NOTE
Announce packets can ensure the 1588v2 clock synchronization between devices. If an interface discards
Announce packets, the device where the interface resides cannot receive clock synchronization information
from other 1588v2 devices. Usually, this command is configured on the interface at the user side.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
ptp asymmetry-correction { positive | negative } asymmetry-correction
The asymmetric correction time for sending 1588v2 packets on the interface is set.
By default, the asymmetric correction time for sending 1588v2 packets is not set.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
ptp clock-step { one-step | two-step }
The timestamping mode of the synchronization packets sending by the 1588v2 port is set.
By default, the mode in which 1588v2 packets are timestamped is one-step.
----End
12.3.4 Configuring Time Attributes for PTP Packets
Procedure
l Configuring time attributes for Announce packets
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-interval announce-interval
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
213
The interval for sending Announce packets on an interface is set to the announce-
intervalth power of 2, in milliseconds.
The default value of announce-interval is 7, which means that the interval for sending
Announce packets on the interface is 128 ms.
4. (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-receipt-timeout timeout-value
The timeout period for receiving Announce packets on an interface is set to the nth
power of 2, in milliseconds, where n is specified by timeout-value.
The default timeout-time is 9, which means that the timeout period for receiving
Announce packets on the interface is 512 ms.
l Configuring time attributes for Delay packets
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp min-req-interval interval-value
The interval for sending PdelayReq packets and DelayReq packets on an interface is
set to the interval-valueth power of 2, in milliseconds.
The default interval-value is 7, which means that the interval for sending PdelayReq
packets and DelayReq packets on the interface is 128 ms.
----End
12.3.5 Configuring Encapsulation Types for PTP Packets
Prerequisite
Before configuring encapsulation modes for 1588v2 packets, check the link type for 1588v2
packet transmission:
l The Layer 2 link adopts the MAC encapsulation mode for 1588v2 packets.
l The Layer 3 link adopts the UDP encapsulation mode for 1588v2 packets.
NOTE
The encapsulation modes of 1588v2 packets sent from interfaces of devices enabled with time
synchronization must be the same. If different encapsulation modes are used, devices cannot interwork.
Context
By default, the MAC encapsulation mode is used.
Procedure
l Configuring the MAC encapsulation mode
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
214
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp mac-egress destination-mac destination-mac
The 1588v2 packets to be sent from the interface are encapsulated in MAC
encapsulation mode, and the destination MAC address is configured.
For unicast MAC encapsulation
Specify the unicast destination MAC address encapsulated in the 1588v2 packet
in the interface view.
For multicast MAC encapsulation
A default multicast destination MAC address is adopted, which means that
destination-MAC destination-MAC command does not need to be performed. The
default multicast destination MAC address varies with delay measurement
mechanisms as shown in the following table.
Packet Type MAC Address
All except peer delay measurement
mechanisms
01-1B-19-00-00-00
Peer delay measurement mechanism 01-80-C2-00-00-0E

NOTE
If the unicast destination MAC address is not configured, a multicast destination MAC address
is adopted by default.
4. Run:
ptp mac-egress vlan vlan-id [ priority priority-value ]
The VLAN ID for transmitting MAC-encapsulated 1588v2 packets and the 802.1p
priority of the 1588v2 packet are configured.
l (Optional) Configuring the UDP encapsulation mode
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip [ destination-ip destination-ip ]
The 1588v2 packets to be sent from the interface are encapsulated in UDP
encapsulation mode, and the source and destination IP addresses are configured.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
215
For unicast UDP encapsulation
Specify the unicast destination IP address encapsulated in the 1588v2 packet in
the interface view.
For multicast UDP encapsulation
A default multicast destination IP address is adopted, which means that
destination-ip destination-ip does not need to be configured. The default multicast
destination IP address varies with delay measurement mechanisms as shown in the
following table.
Packet Type IP Address
All except peer delay measurement
mechanisms
224.0.1.129
Peer delay measurement mechanism 224.0.0.107

NOTE
If the parameter destination-ip destination-ip is not configured, a multicast IP address is
adopted.
4. Run:
ptp udp-egress destination-mac destination-mac
The next hop MAC address of the 1588v2 packet is configured.
5. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip [ dscp dscp ]
The DSCP priority to be carried in the UDP-encapsulated 1588v2 packet is configured.
6. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip vlan vlan-id [ priority priority ]
The VLAN ID for sending 1588v2 packets and the priority of the UDP-encapsulated
1588v2 packet are configured on the interface.
----End
12.3.6 Checking the Configuration
Prerequisite
All configurations of OC1 and OC2 are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display ptp all [ state | config ] command to display the operation status and
configuration of 1588v2.
l Run the display ptp interface interface-type interface-number command to display
1588v2 information of the interface on the 1588v2 device.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
216
12.4 Configuring PTP for a BC
12.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
As shown in Figure 12-5, NodeBs need to synchronize with the BITS. All switches on the bearer
network support 1588v2, and NodeBs do not support 1588v2. BC is connected to the BITS to
synchronize with the BITS clock and advertise clock information to other clocks on the bearer
network. Other backbone nodes on the bearer network are deployed as BC, which can therefore
synchronize with the BITS clock source and advertise clock information to downstream clocks.
Besides that, two OCs are deployed at the user side of the bearer network to synchronize with
the upstream BITS clock and advertise clock information to NodeBs in traditional mode. By
adopting the preceding network deployment scheme that combines 1588v2 and the traditional
NTP synchronization mode, clocks on the bearer network and wireless network can be
synchronized based on the combination of 1588v2 and the traditional NTP synchronization
mode.
Figure 12-5 Configuring 1588v2 on a BC
BITS
NodeB
OC1
BC1 BC2
OC2 NodeB
BC3

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring 1588v2 on BC, complete the following tasks:
l Configuring parameters of link layer protocols on interfaces to make the status of link layer
protocols Up
l Ensuring that BC2 has correctly imported clock and time signals from the BITS
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
217
Data Preparation
To configure 1588v2 on BC, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number and IP address of each interface
2 (Optional) IDs of 1588v2 domains to which devices belong
3 (Optional) Asymmetric correction value of the 1588v2 packet
4 (Optional) Interval for sending Announce packets and the timeout period for
receiving Announce packets
5 (Optional) Interval for sending Sync packets
6 (Optional) Minimum interval for sending Delay packets
7 (Optional) Destination MAC address, source IP address, destination IP address,
DSCP value, VLAN ID, and corresponding priority encapsulated into the 1588v2
packet

12.4.2 Configuring PTP Globally
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ptp enable
1588v2 is enabled on the BC.
Step 3 Run:
ptp device-type bc
The device type is configured as BC.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
ptp domain domain-value
The domain where the 1588v2 port resides is set.
NOTE
Clocks that need to be synchronized through 1588v2 packets must belong to the same 1588v2 clock domain.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
ptp virtual-clock-id clock-id-value
The virtual clock ID of the BC is set.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
218
12.4.3 Configuring PTP for an Interface
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
ptp delay-mechanism { delay | pdelay }
A delay measurement mechanism is configured for the device, which can be either of the
following:
l Delay mode:
A delay request-response mechanism, in which information about the clock and time is
calculated according to the delay of the entire link between the master clock and slave clock.
l PDelay mode:
A peer delay mechanism, in which information about the time and clock is calculated
according to the delay of each segment of the link between the master clock and slave clock.
NOTE
Different delay measurement mechanisms cannot replace each other. Therefore, delay measurement
mechanisms configured on 1588v2 interfaces on the same link segment must be identical.
Step 4 Run:
ptp enable
1588v2 is enabled on the interface.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-drop enable
The interface of the 1588v2 device is configured to discard the received Announce packets.
NOTE
Announce packets can ensure the 1588v2 clock synchronization between devices. If an interface discards
Announce packets, the device where the interface resides cannot receive clock synchronization information
from other 1588v2 devices. Usually, this command is configured on the interface at the user side.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
ptp asymmetry-correction { positive | negative } asymmetry-correction
The asymmetric correction time for sending 1588v2 packets on the interface is set.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
ptp clock-step { one-step | two-step }
The timestamping mode of the synchronization packets sending by the 1588v2 port is set.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
219
12.4.4 Configuring Time Attributes for PTP Packets
Procedure
l Configuring time attributes for Announce packets
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-interval announce-interval
The interval for sending Announce packets on an interface is set to the announce-
intervalth power of 2, in milliseconds.
The default value of announce-interval is 7, which means that the interval for sending
Announce packets on the interface is 128 ms.
4. (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-receipt-timeout timeout-value
The timeout period for receiving Announce packets on an interface is set to the nth
power of 2, in milliseconds, where n is specified by timeout-value.
The default timeout-time is 9, which means that the timeout period for receiving
Announce packets on the interface is 512 ms.
l Configuring time attributes for Delay packets
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp min-req-interval interval-value
The interval for sending PdelayReq packets and DelayReq packets on an interface is
set to the interval-valueth power of 2, in milliseconds.
The default interval-value is 7, which means that the interval for sending PdelayReq
packets and DelayReq packets on the interface is 128 ms.
----End
12.4.5 Configuring Encapsulation Types for PTP Packets
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
220
Prerequisite
Before configuring encapsulation modes for 1588v2 packets, check the link type for 1588v2
packet transmission:
l The Layer 2 link adopts the MAC encapsulation mode for 1588v2 packets.
l The Layer 3 link adopts the UDP encapsulation mode for 1588v2 packets.
NOTE
The encapsulation modes of 1588v2 packets sent from interfaces of devices enabled with time
synchronization must be the same. If different encapsulation modes are used, devices cannot interwork.
Context
By default, the MAC encapsulation mode is used.
Procedure
l Configuring the MAC encapsulation mode
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp mac-egress destination-mac destination-mac
The 1588v2 packets to be sent from the interface are encapsulated in MAC
encapsulation mode, and the destination MAC address is configured.
For unicast MAC encapsulation
Specify the unicast destination MAC address encapsulated in the 1588v2 packet
in the interface view.
For multicast MAC encapsulation
A default multicast destination MAC address is adopted, which means that
destination-MAC destination-MAC command does not need to be performed. The
default multicast destination MAC address varies with delay measurement
mechanisms as shown in the following table.
Packet Type MAC Address
All except peer delay measurement
mechanisms
01-1B-19-00-00-00
Peer delay measurement mechanism 01-80-C2-00-00-0E

NOTE
If the unicast destination MAC address is not configured, a multicast destination MAC address
is adopted by default.
4. Run:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
221
ptp mac-egress vlan vlan-id [ priority priority-value ]
The VLAN ID for transmitting MAC-encapsulated 1588v2 packets and the 802.1p
priority of the 1588v2 packet are configured.
l (Optional) Configuring the UDP encapsulation mode
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip [ destination-ip destination-ip ]
The 1588v2 packets to be sent from the interface are encapsulated in UDP
encapsulation mode, and the source and destination IP addresses are configured.
For unicast UDP encapsulation
Specify the unicast destination IP address encapsulated in the 1588v2 packet in
the interface view.
For multicast UDP encapsulation
A default multicast destination IP address is adopted, which means that
destination-ip destination-ip does not need to be configured. The default multicast
destination IP address varies with delay measurement mechanisms as shown in the
following table.
Packet Type IP Address
All except peer delay measurement
mechanisms
224.0.1.129
Peer delay measurement mechanism 224.0.0.107

NOTE
If the parameter destination-ip destination-ip is not configured, a multicast IP address is
adopted.
4. Run:
ptp udp-egress destination-mac destination-mac
The next hop MAC address of the 1588v2 packet is configured.
5. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip [ dscp dscp ]
The DSCP priority to be carried in the UDP-encapsulated 1588v2 packet is configured.
6. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip vlan vlan-id [ priority priority ]
The VLAN ID for sending 1588v2 packets and the priority of the UDP-encapsulated
1588v2 packet are configured on the interface.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
222
12.4.6 Checking the Configuration
Prerequisite
All configurations of the BC are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display ptp all command to display the operation status and configuration of
1588v2.
l Run the display ptp interface interface-type interface-number command to display
1588v2 information of the interface.
----End
12.5 Configuring PTP for a TC
12.5.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
As shown in Figure 12-6, S9300 as Master, NodeBs support 1588v2. 1588v2 is configured to
ensure the clock synchronization between devices on the bearer network. Core devices on the
bearer network function as TC to forward 1588v2 packets and synchronize the clock or time
between BC and OC.
Figure 12-6 Configuring 1588v2 on TC
BITS
NodeB OC1
TC1 BC TC2
OC2
NodeB
Master
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
223

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring 1588v2 on TC, complete the following tasks:
l Configuring parameters of link layer protocols on interfaces to make the status of link layer
protocols Up
l Ensuring that Master has correctly imported clock and time signals from the BITS
Data Preparation
To configure 1588v2 on TC, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number and IP address of each interface
2 (Optional) IDs of 1588v2 domains to which devices belong
3 (Optional) Asymmetric correction value of the 1588v2 packet
4 (Optional) Interval for sending Announce packets and the timeout period for
receiving Announce packets
5 (Optional) Minimum interval for sending Delay packets
6 (Optional) Destination MAC address, source IP address, destination IP address,
DSCP value, VLAN ID, and corresponding priority encapsulated into the 1588v2
packet

12.5.2 Configuring PTP Globally
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ptp enable
1588v2 is enabled on the TC.
NOTE
On the TC device, the interfaces for receiving and sending 1588v2 packets must be enabled with PTP.
Otherwise, the resident time of the device cannot be calculated correctly. In this case, only packets are
forwarded.
Step 3 Run:
ptp device-type { e2etc | e2etcoc | p2ptc | p2ptcoc }
The 1588v2 device type is configured as TC.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
224
l e2etc: configures the clock mode of the device to E2ETC.
l e2etcoc: configures the clock mode of the device to E2ETCOC.
l p2ptc: configures the clock mode of the device to P2PTC.
l p2ptcoc: configures the clock mode of the device to P2PTCOC.
NOTE
TCOC is a special type of TC. TCOC can also synchronize frequency with its upstream clock.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
ptp domain domain-value
The domain to which the 1588v2 interface belongs is configured.
NOTE
Clocks need to be synchronized through 1588v2 packets must belong to the same 1588v2 clock domain.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
ptp virtual-clock-id clock-id-value
The virtual clock ID of the TC is set.
----End
12.5.3 Configuring PTP for an Interface
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
ptp enable
1588v2 is enabled on the interface.
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
ptp tcoc-clock-id clock-source-id { port-num port-num | slot slot-id card card-id
port port-id }
The clock source traced by an interface on the TCOC is configured.
NOTE
This command takes effect only on the TCOC.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
ptp asymmetry-correction { positive | negative } asymmetry-correction
The asymmetric correction time for sending 1588v2 packets on the interface is set.
Step 6 (Optional) Run:
ptp clock-step { one-step | two-step }
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
225
The timestamping mode of the synchronization packets sending by the 1588v2 port is set.
----End
12.5.4 Configuring Time Attributes for PTP Packets
Procedure
l Configuring time attributes for Announce packets
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-interval announce-interval
The interval for sending Announce packets on an interface is set to the announce-
intervalth power of 2, in milliseconds.
The default value of announce-interval is 7, which means that the interval for sending
Announce packets on the interface is 128 ms.
4. (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-receipt-timeout timeout-value
The timeout period for receiving Announce packets on an interface is set to the nth
power of 2, in milliseconds, where n is specified by timeout-value.
The default timeout-time is 9, which means that the timeout period for receiving
Announce packets on the interface is 512 ms.
l Configuring time attributes for Delay packets
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp min-req-interval interval-value
The interval for sending PdelayReq packets and DelayReq packets on an interface is
set to the interval-valueth power of 2, in milliseconds.
The default interval-value is 7, which means that the interval for sending PdelayReq
packets and DelayReq packets on the interface is 128 ms.
----End
12.5.5 Configuring Encapsulation Types for PTP Packets
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
226
Prerequisite
Before configuring encapsulation modes for 1588v2 packets, check the link type for 1588v2
packet transmission:
l The Layer 2 link adopts the MAC encapsulation mode for 1588v2 packets.
l The Layer 3 link adopts the UDP encapsulation mode for 1588v2 packets.
NOTE
The encapsulation modes of 1588v2 packets sent from interfaces of devices enabled with time
synchronization must be the same. If different encapsulation modes are used, devices cannot interwork.
Context
By default, the MAC encapsulation mode is used.
Procedure
l Configuring the MAC encapsulation mode
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp mac-egress destination-mac destination-mac
The 1588v2 packets to be sent from the interface are encapsulated in MAC
encapsulation mode, and the destination MAC address is configured.
For unicast MAC encapsulation
Specify the unicast destination MAC address encapsulated in the 1588v2 packet
in the interface view.
For multicast MAC encapsulation
A default multicast destination MAC address is adopted, which means that
destination-MAC destination-MAC command does not need to be performed. The
default multicast destination MAC address varies with delay measurement
mechanisms as shown in the following table.
Packet Type MAC Address
All except peer delay measurement
mechanisms
01-1B-19-00-00-00
Peer delay measurement mechanism 01-80-C2-00-00-0E

NOTE
If the unicast destination MAC address is not configured, a multicast destination MAC address
is adopted by default.
4. Run:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
227
ptp mac-egress vlan vlan-id [ priority priority-value ]
The VLAN ID for transmitting MAC-encapsulated 1588v2 packets and the 802.1p
priority of the 1588v2 packet are configured.
l (Optional) Configuring the UDP encapsulation mode
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip [ destination-ip destination-ip ]
The 1588v2 packets to be sent from the interface are encapsulated in UDP
encapsulation mode, and the source and destination IP addresses are configured.
For unicast UDP encapsulation
Specify the unicast destination IP address encapsulated in the 1588v2 packet in
the interface view.
For multicast UDP encapsulation
A default multicast destination IP address is adopted, which means that
destination-ip destination-ip does not need to be configured. The default multicast
destination IP address varies with delay measurement mechanisms as shown in the
following table.
Packet Type IP Address
All except peer delay measurement
mechanisms
224.0.1.129
Peer delay measurement mechanism 224.0.0.107

NOTE
If the parameter destination-ip destination-ip is not configured, a multicast IP address is
adopted.
4. Run:
ptp udp-egress destination-mac destination-mac
The next hop MAC address of the 1588v2 packet is configured.
5. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip [ dscp dscp ]
The DSCP priority to be carried in the UDP-encapsulated 1588v2 packet is configured.
6. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip vlan vlan-id [ priority priority ]
The VLAN ID for sending 1588v2 packets and the priority of the UDP-encapsulated
1588v2 packet are configured on the interface.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
228
12.5.6 Checking the Configuration
Prerequisite
All configurations of the TC are configured.
Procedure
l Run the display ptp all [state | config ] command to display the operation status and
configuration of 1588v2.
l Run the display ptp interface interface-type interface-number command to display
1588v2 information of the interface.
----End
12.6 Configuring PTP for a TCandBC
12.6.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
As shown in Figure 12-7, all S9300s and NodeB support 1588v2. Operator A has NodeBs, and
a BITS standard clock source BTIS2, but do not have bearer network devices. Operator B leases
its bearer network to Operator A. Devices on the bearer network synchronize with the BITS
standard clock source BTIS1 of Operator B. The following network deployment scheme is
adopted to ensure that clock synchronization is implemented independently on devices of
Operator A and Operator B:
l BC1 and OC1 are respectively connected to BITS1 and BITS2, and advertise clock
synchronization information to downstream clocks through 1588v2 packets.
l The interface on TCandBC1 that is directly connected to BC1 is a BC interface, which
synchronizes the clock in Domain1; the interface of TCandBC1 at the user side is a TC
interface.
l The interface on TCandBC2 that is directly connected to BC1 is a BC interface, which
synchronizes the clock in Domain1; the interface of TCandBC2 at the user side is a TC
interface.
l The type of the interfaces directly connecting TCBC2 and OC2, TCBC2 and TCBC1, and
TCBC1 and OC1 are TC. OC2 receives the 1588v2 packets sent from TCandBC1 through
TCandBC2 and synchronizes with the clock signals from TCandBC1. Then, OC2 advertises
clock signals to NodeB in the traditional mode, such as the Ethernet-based clock
synchronization.
l P node functions as a BC to implement 1588v2 synchronization and transmit messages
between TCandBC1 and TCandBC2.
The entire bearer network functions as a huge TC, which transparently transmits BIST2 clock
information to NodeB.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
229
Figure 12-7 Configuring 1588v2 on a TCandBC
TCBC2
NodeB
TCBC1
BITS2
OC2
OC1
Domain1
BITS1
BC1
Domain2
P
P
W

Pre-configuration Tasks
Before configuring 1588v2 on a TCandBC, complete the following tasks:
l Configuring parameters of link layer protocols on interfaces to make the status of link layer
protocols Up
l Ensuring that OC1 and OC2 have correctly imported clock and time signals from the BITS
Data Preparation
To configure 1588v2 on a TCandBC, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number and IP address of each interface
2 (Optional) IDs of 1588v2 domains to which devices belong
3 (Optional) Asymmetric correction value of the 1588v2 packet
4 (Optional) Interval for sending Announce packets and the timeout period for
receiving Announce packets
5 (Optional) Interval for sending Sync packets
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
230
No. Data
6 (Optional) Minimum interval for sending Delay packets
7 (Optional) Destination MAC address, source IP address, destination IP address,
DSCP value, VLAN ID, and corresponding priority encapsulated into the 1588v2
packet

12.6.2 Configuring PTP Globally
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ptp enable
1588v2 is enabled on the device.
Step 3 Run:
ptp device-type tcandbc
The device type is configured as TCandBC.
Step 4 Run:
ptp domain domain-value
The value of the 1588v2 domain to which the BC ports of TCandBC belong is configured.
Step 5 (Optional) Run:
ptp virtual-clock-id clock-id-value
The virtual clock ID of the TCandBC is set.
----End
12.6.3 Configuring PTP for an Interface
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
231
Step 3 Run:
ptp port-type { bc | tc }
The type of the 1588v2 interface either TC or BC.
Step 4 In the TC interface view, run:
ptp domain domain-value
The domain to which the 1588v2 interface belongs is configured.
NOTE
The 1588v2 clock domain configured in the system view is the domain to which the BC interface belongs,
and you do not need to configure a domain for the BC interface.
You can specify the domain that the TC interface belongs to in the interface view or use the 1588v2 clock
domain in the system view.
The TC interface forwards 1588v2 packets of all the domains. To forward 1588v2 packets of each domain
independently, you need to configure related packet forwarding mechanisms.
Step 5 Run:
ptp delay-mechanism { delay | pdelay }
A delay measurement mechanism is configured for the device, which can be either of the
following:
l Delay mode:
A delay request-response mechanism, in which information about the clock and time is
calculated according to the delay of the entire link between the master clock and slave clock.
l PDelay mode:
A peer delay mechanism, in which information about the clock and time is calculated
according to the delay of each segment of the link between the master clock and slave clock.
NOTE
The delay measurement mechanisms on 1588v2 interfaces of the same link must be the same; otherwise,
the clock precision is imprecise.
Step 6 Run:
ptp enable
1588v2 is enabled on the interface.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-drop enable
The interface of the 1588v2 device is configured to discard the received Announce packets.
NOTE
Announce packets can ensure the 1588v2 clock synchronization between devices. When an interface of
the 1588v2 device is configured to discard the received Announce messages, the 1588v2 device cannot
receive clock synchronization information from other devices through this interface. Usually, this command
is configured on the user-side interface of the 1588v2 device.
Step 8 (Optional) Run:
ptp asymmetry-correction { positive | negative } asymmetry-correction
The asymmetric correction time for sending 1588v2 packets on the interface is set.
Step 9 (Optional) Run:
ptp clock-step { one-step | two-step }
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
232
The timestamping mode of the synchronization packets sending by the 1588v2 port is set.
----End
12.6.4 Configuring Time Attributes for PTP Packets
Procedure
l Configuring time attributes for Announce packets
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-interval announce-interval
The interval for sending Announce packets on an interface is set to the announce-
intervalth power of 2, in milliseconds.
The default value of announce-interval is 7, which means that the interval for sending
Announce packets on the interface is 128 ms.
4. (Optional) Run:
ptp announce-receipt-timeout timeout-value
The timeout period for receiving Announce packets on an interface is set to the nth
power of 2, in milliseconds, where n is specified by timeout-value.
The default timeout-time is 9, which means that the timeout period for receiving
Announce packets on the interface is 512 ms.
l Configuring time attributes for Delay packets
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp min-req-interval interval-value
The interval for sending PdelayReq packets and DelayReq packets on an interface is
set to the interval-valueth power of 2, in milliseconds.
The default interval-value is 7, which means that the interval for sending PdelayReq
packets and DelayReq packets on the interface is 128 ms.
----End
12.6.5 Configuring Encapsulation Types for PTP Packets
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
233
Prerequisite
Before configuring encapsulation modes for 1588v2 packets, check the link type for 1588v2
packet transmission:
l The Layer 2 link adopts the MAC encapsulation mode for 1588v2 packets.
l The Layer 3 link adopts the UDP encapsulation mode for 1588v2 packets.
NOTE
The encapsulation modes of 1588v2 packets sent from interfaces of devices enabled with time
synchronization must be the same. If different encapsulation modes are used, devices cannot interwork.
Context
By default, the MAC encapsulation mode is used.
Procedure
l Configuring the MAC encapsulation mode
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. (Optional) Run:
ptp mac-egress destination-mac destination-mac
The 1588v2 packets to be sent from the interface are encapsulated in MAC
encapsulation mode, and the destination MAC address is configured.
For unicast MAC encapsulation
Specify the unicast destination MAC address encapsulated in the 1588v2 packet
in the interface view.
For multicast MAC encapsulation
A default multicast destination MAC address is adopted, which means that
destination-MAC destination-MAC command does not need to be performed. The
default multicast destination MAC address varies with delay measurement
mechanisms as shown in the following table.
Packet Type MAC Address
All except peer delay measurement
mechanisms
01-1B-19-00-00-00
Peer delay measurement mechanism 01-80-C2-00-00-0E

NOTE
If the unicast destination MAC address is not configured, a multicast destination MAC address
is adopted by default.
4. Run:
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
234
ptp mac-egress vlan vlan-id [ priority priority-value ]
The VLAN ID for transmitting MAC-encapsulated 1588v2 packets and the 802.1p
priority of the 1588v2 packet are configured.
l (Optional) Configuring the UDP encapsulation mode
1. Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
2. Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip [ destination-ip destination-ip ]
The 1588v2 packets to be sent from the interface are encapsulated in UDP
encapsulation mode, and the source and destination IP addresses are configured.
For unicast UDP encapsulation
Specify the unicast destination IP address encapsulated in the 1588v2 packet in
the interface view.
For multicast UDP encapsulation
A default multicast destination IP address is adopted, which means that
destination-ip destination-ip does not need to be configured. The default multicast
destination IP address varies with delay measurement mechanisms as shown in the
following table.
Packet Type IP Address
All except peer delay measurement
mechanisms
224.0.1.129
Peer delay measurement mechanism 224.0.0.107

NOTE
If the parameter destination-ip destination-ip is not configured, a multicast IP address is
adopted.
4. Run:
ptp udp-egress destination-mac destination-mac
The next hop MAC address of the 1588v2 packet is configured.
5. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip [ dscp dscp ]
The DSCP priority to be carried in the UDP-encapsulated 1588v2 packet is configured.
6. Run:
ptp udp-egress source-ip source-ip vlan vlan-id [ priority priority ]
The VLAN ID for sending 1588v2 packets and the priority of the UDP-encapsulated
1588v2 packet are configured on the interface.
----End
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
235
12.6.6 Checking the Configuration
Prerequisite
All configurations of the TCandBC are configured.
Procedure
l Run the display ptp all [state | config ] command to display the operation status and
configuration of 1588v2.
l Run the display ptp interface interface-type interface-number command to display
1588v2 information of the interface.
----End
12.7 Configuring the PTP Clock Source
12.7.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
On a 1588v2 network, the grandmaster clock usually imports clock or time signals from an
external BITS time source, such as a GPS, and then advertises these clock or time signals to
downstream clocks through 1588v2 packets to implement clock synchronization of the entire
network. In this case, to ensure clock synchronization between 1588v2 devices, a BITS time
source must be correctly imported.
Pre-configuration Tasks
None.
Data Preparation
To configure a 1588v2 time source, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number of the interface from which the clock and time signals of the BITS time
source is imported
2 (Optional) Type of the time source
3 (Optional) Class of the time source
4 (Optional) Priority of the time source
5 (Optional) Accuracy of the time source

Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
236
12.7.2 Configuring BITS Signals to Participate in the BMC
Calculation
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ptp clock-source { bits0 | bits1 } { off | on }
BITS signals can be configured to participate in or do not participate in the BMC calculation.
----End
12.7.3 Configuring Attributes for the PTP Clock Source
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
ptp clock-source { local | bits0 | bits1 }time-source time-source
The type of the time source to be traced is configured.
NOTE
The attribute of the time-source can be configured only on the grandmaster clock. The external time source
to which the device connects should be configured with corresponding parameters. The mapping between
the time-source-value and external time source is on the Command Reference.
Step 3 Run:
ptp clock-source { local | bits0 | bits1 }clock-accuracy clock-accuracy
The clock accuracy of the time source is configured.
Step 4 Run:
ptp clock-source { local | bits0 | bits1 }clock-class clock-class
The class of the time source is configured.
NOTE
When clock-class-value is smaller than 128, the device cannot be slave clock.
Step 5 Run:
ptp clock-source { local | bits0 | bits1 }priority1 priority1
The value is set for priority1 of the time source.
Step 6 Run:
ptp clock-source { local | bits0 | bits1 }priority2 priority2
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
237
The value is set for priority2 of the time source.
Step 7 (Optional) Run:
ptp { bits-1pps | bits-dcls } { receive-delay receive-delay | send-delay send-
delay }
The correction for the delay of sending or receiving clock source signals is set.
----End
12.7.4 Checking the Configuration
Prerequisite
All configurations of the 1588v2 time source are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display ptp all command to check the status and configuration of PTP.
----End
12.8 Maintaining PTP
12.8.1 Clearing PTP Statistics
Context
CAUTION
Statistics cannot be restored after being cleared. So, confirm the action before you run the
command.
After confirming that 1588v2 statistics need to be cleared, run the following command in the
user view.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
reset ptp statistics { all | interface interface-type interface-number }
The counter counting the number of received 1588v2 packets on the interface is reset, making
statistics on 1588v2 packets to be cleared.
----End
12.8.2 Monitoring PTP
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
238
Context
In routine maintenance, you can run the following command in any view to view the operation
status of 1588v2.
Procedure
l Run:
display ptp { all [ config | state ] | interface interface-type interface-
number }
Information about the configuration and operation status of 1588v2 is displayed.
----End
12.8.3 Debugging PTP
Context
CAUTION
Debugging affects the performance of the system. After the debugging, run the undo debugging
all command to disable it at once.
When an operation fault occurs, run the following debugging command in the user view to
display the debugging information and locate the fault.
Procedure
l Run:
debugging ptp { all | event | packet | protocol | sync }
1588v2 debugging is enabled.
----End
12.9 Configuration Examples
12.9.1 Example for Configuring the BITS as the PTP Master Clock
Source
Configuration Roadmap
The 1588v2 technology transmits clock signals on the network. If a network clock signal needs
to be synchronized with the external clock source, you need to introduce the standard clock
source independently.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
239
As shown in Figure 12-8, the BITS is connected to an external GPS to advertise the input clock
or time signals to the device named Master, which serves as the master clock of the bearer
network and advertises the received clock or time signals to devices on the bearer network.
The BITS of the switch Master is connected to two-channel clock sources: BITS0 and BITS1.
BITS0 obtains a frequency signal through Ethernet synchronization and BITS1 obtains a time
signal through 1588v2. The switch synchronizes the time through Ethernet synchronization and
1588v2.
Figure 12-8 Networking diagram of configuring the BITS as the 1588v2 clock source
BITS
NodeB
CE1
PE1 PE3 PE2
CE2
NodeB
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/1
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/1
GE1/0/0 GE1/0/0
GE1/0/1
Master
GE1/0/1 GE1/0/1
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/2

The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Connect Master to the BITS clock.
2. Configure attributes for the BITS clock.
3. Configure the BITS as the 1588v2 clock or time source.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l BITS signal type
l Attributes of the BITS time source, including time source value
l Priority of the static clock source
Procedure
Step 1 Connect Master to the BITS clock source, that is, BITS0, BTS1.
Step 2 Configure attributes for the input signals of the BITS clock.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
240
<Master> system-view
[Master] clock bits-type hz-2m bits0
[Master] clock priority 1 source 1 system
[Master] clock manual-switch source 1 system
[Master] clock bits-type 1pps-tod in bits1
[Master] ptp clock-source bits1 on
NOTE
The default WTR time of a clock source is 1 minute. Generally, you do not need to change the default
value.
If you want to see the clock source switching result during debugging, set the WTR time to 0.
Step 3 Configure attributes for the BITS clock source on Master.
[Master] ptp clock-source bits1 time-source 2
NOTE
BITS is connected to an external time source, namely, GPS, and its time-source is 2.
Step 4 Enable basic 1588v2 functions on Master and configure the device type as OC.
<Master> system-view
[Master] ptp enable
[Master] ptp device-type oc
[Master] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[Master-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
[Master-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp enable
[Master-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
Step 5 Verify the configuration.
After the preceding configurations, run the display clock source command in any view on
Master. You can view that BITS0 and BITS1 on Master are in Normal state, indicating that
Master has successfully traced the BITS clock source.
<Master> display clock source
Reference Clock Source Signal Fail S1 Byte ID SSM
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0 Inner Clock No -- - SEC
1 BITS0 No 0f - DNU
2 BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
3 Peer Board BITS0 Yes -- - DNU
4 Peer Board BITS1 Yes -- - DNU
5 Left Frame Clock Yes -- - DNU
6 Right Frame Clock Yes -- - DNU
7 FSU Yes -- - DNU
8 Peer Board FSU Yes -- - DNU
9 System Clock No -- - DNU
Run the display clock mode command in system view on Master. You can view that Master
has stepped into lock mode, which means the frequency of Master has traced the signal from
BITS0 port.
<Master> system-view
[Master] display clock mode
QL-Enable : No.
Freq-Check : No.
Retrieve : Yes.
Hold Type : Hold 24 hours.
Run Mode : Trace.(SyncOK)
Bits0 : Locked.
Bits1 : Locked.
System mode: Manual-switch to clock source 1: BITS0.
Bits0 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Bits1 mode : Auto select clock source 9: System Clock.
Clock time : 1pps-tod time from bits1
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
241
After the configurations, run the display ptp all command on Master, and you can view the
current operation status of 1588v2.
<Master> display ptp all
Device config info
------------------------------------------------------------------
PTP state :enabled Domain value :0
Slave only :no Device type :OC
Static BMC :no Local clock ID :00e0fcfffe010203
PTP freq-sync :no
BMC run info
------------------------------------------------------------------
Source port :bits1
Leap :None
UTC Offset :0
UTC Offset Valid :False
Port info
Name State Delay-mech Ann-timeout Type Domain
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/0 master pdelay 9 OC 0
Clock source info
Clock Pri1 Pri2 Accuracy Class TimeSrc Signal Switch Direction In-Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------
local 128 128 0x31 187 0xa0 - - - -
bits0 128 128 0x20 6 0x20 none off -/- abnormal
bits1 0 128 0x10 1 0x20 1pps on in/- normal
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of Master
#
sysname Master
#
clock priority 1 source 1 system
clock manual-switch source 1 system
clock bits-type hz-2m bits0
clock bits-type 1pps-tod in bits1
#
ptp enable
ptp device-type oc
ptp clock-source bits1 clock-accuracy 10
ptp clock-source bits1 clock-class 1
ptp clock-source bits1 priority1 0
ptp clock-source bits1 on
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ptp delay-mechanism
pdelay
ptp enable
#
12.9.2 Example for Configuring Clock Synchronization Through
Unicast UDP-Encapsulation 1588v2 Packets in Pdelay Mechanism
Serving as a clock synchronization protocol, 1588v2 can transmit frequency signals and time
signals of BITS servers across an entire network, which achieves clock synchronization between
the wireless bearer network and wireless access network. For the NodeBs that support only UDP
encapsulation, S9300s can send UDP-encapsulated 1588v2 packets to these NodeBs.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
242
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 12-9and all its nodes support 1588v2. PE1 and PE2 obtain clock signals
from BITS servers. NodeB 2 does not support 1588v2 but supports frequency synchronization
through the synchronous Ethernet clock. NodeB 1 and NodeB 3 support 1588v2. Frequency
synchronization can be achieved between wireless NodeBs and the bearer network devices, and
time synchronization can be achieved between 1588v2-aware NodeBs and the bearer network
devices.
All devices of the bearer network support 1588v2 so that they can be configured as BCs to
transmit clock information. In addition, CE2 can send E1 signals carrying frequency information
to non-1588v2-aware NodeB 2 for restoring frequency synchronization.
Figure 12-9 Networking diagram of synchronizing all clocks of an entire network through
unicast UDP-encapsulated 1588v2 packets
BITS
NodeB1
with 1588v2
NodeB3
with 1588v2
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/1
GE1/0/1
BITS
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/1
NodeB2
without 1588v2
PE1 PE2 CE1 CE2
E1
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/1
Device Name Interface Number Interface IP Address
PE1 GE 1/0/0 10.0.0.1/24
PE1 GE 1/0/1 11.0.0.1/24
PE2 GE 1/0/0 10.0.0.2/24
PE2 GE 1/0/1 12.0.0.1/24
CE1 GE 1/0/0 11.0.0.2/24
CE1 GE 1/0/1 13.0.0.1/24
CE2 GE 1/0/0 12.0.0.2/24
CE2 GE 1/0/1 15.0.0.1/24
NodeB1 - 13.0.0.2/24
NodeB3 - 15.0.0.2/24
Device Name Interface Number Interface MAC Address
PE1 GE1/0/1 0000-1111-1111
PE2 GE1/0/1 0000-1111-2222
CE1 GE1/0/0 1111-2222-1111
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
243
CE1 GE1/0/1 1111-2222-1111
CE2 GE1/0/0 1111-2222-3333
CE2 GE1/0/1 1111-2222-3333
NodeB1 - 2222-3333-1111
NodeB3 - 2222-3333-2222

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Enable a routing protocol, that is, OSPF, to ensure the interworking between devices.
2. Connect PE1 and PE2 to BITS clocks.
3. Configure PE1, PE2, CE1, and CE2 as BCs.
4. Encapsulate 1588v2 packets through unicast UDP in this example.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l 1588 link delay measurement mechanism: Pdelay
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the IP address of each interface and enable OSPF to ensure the interworking between
devices. The configuration details are not mentioned here.
Step 2 Configure PE1 and PE2 to import BITS clock signals through their clock interfaces.
For the detailed configurations, see the section Example for Configuring the BITS as the PTP
Clock Source.
Step 3 Configure PE1, PE2, CE1, and CE2 as BCs.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] ptp enable
[PE1] ptp device-type bc
[PE1] clock bits-type 1pps-tod in bits0
[PE1] ptp freq-sync
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp udp-egress source-ip 11.0.0.1 destination-ip
11.0.0.2
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp udp-egress destination-mac 1111-2222-1111
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp enable
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp udp-egress source-ip 10.0.0.1 destination-ip
10.0.0.2
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp udp-egress destination-mac 0000-1111-2222
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp enable
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
# Configure PE2.
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
244
[PE2] ptp enable
[PE2] ptp device-type bc
[PE2] ptp freq-sync
[PE2] clock bits-type 1pps-tod in bits0
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp udp-egress source-ip 12.0.0.1 destination-ip
12.0.0.2
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp udp-egress destination-mac 1111-2222-3333
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp enable
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp udp-egress source-ip 10.0.0.2 destination-ip
10.0.0.1
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp udp-egress destination-mac 0000-1111-1111
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp enable
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
# Configure CE1.
[CE1] ptp enable
[CE1] ptp device-type bc
[CE1] ptp freq-sync
[CE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp udp-egress source-ip 11.0.0.2 destination-ip
11.0.0.1
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp udp-egress destination-mac 0000-1111-1111
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp enable
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp udp-egress source-ip 13.0.0.1 destination-ip
13.0.0.2
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp udp-egress destination-mac 2222-3333-1111
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp enable
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
# Configure CE2.
[CE2] ptp enable
[CE2] ptp device-type bc
[CE2] ptp freq-sync
[CE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp udp-egress source-ip 12.0.0.2 destination-ip
12.0.0.1
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp udp-egress destination-mac 0000-1111-2222
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp enable
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp udp-egress source-ip 15.0.0.1 destination-ip
15.0.0.2
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp udp-egress destination-mac 2222-3333-2222
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp enable
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
Step 4 Verify the configuration.
After the preceding configurations, run the display ptp all command. You can view the PTP
operation status. Take the display on CE1 as an example. You can view that GE 1/0/0 on CE1
works in the Slave state and you can also view clock IDs of the upstream clock and grandmaster
clock with which CE1 synchronizes. The command output indicates that CE1 has synchronized
with the master clock source.
<CE1> display ptp all
Device config info
------------------------------------------------------------------
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
245
PTP state :enabled Domain value :0
Slave only :no Device type :BC
Static BMC :no Local clock ID :001882fffe1b1235
PTP freq-sync :yes
BMC run info
------------------------------------------------------------------
Grand clock ID :001882fffe77c2cf
Receive number :GigabitEthernet1/0/0
Parent clock ID :001882fffe1b1bf4
Parent portnumber :1024
Priority1 :128 Priority2 :128
Step removed :1 Clock accuracy :32
Clock class :6 Time Source :32
UTC Offset :0 UTC Offset Valid :False
Time Scale :PTP Time Traceable :True
Leap :None Frequence Traceable:True
Port info
Name State Delay-mech Ann-timeout Type Domain
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/0 slave pdelay 9 BC 0
Clock source info
Clock Pri1 Pri2 Accuracy Class TimeSrc Signal Switch Direction In-Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------
local 128 128 0x31 187 0xa0 - - - -
bits0 128 128 0x20 6 0x20 none off -/- abnormal
bits1 128 128 0x20 6 0x20 none off -/- abnormal

----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of CE1
#
sysname CE1
#
ptp enable
ptp device-type bc
ptp freq-sync
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
ptp udp-egress destination-mac 0000-1111-1111
ptp udp-egress source-ip 11.0.0.2 destination-ip 11.0.0.1
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
ptp udp-egress destination-mac 2222-3333-1111
ptp udp-egress source-ip 13.0.0.1 destination-ip 13.0.0.2
#
return

l Configuration file of CE2
#
sysname CE2
#
ptp enable
ptp device-type bc
ptp freq-sync
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ptp enable
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
246
ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
ptp udp-egress destination-mac 0000-1111-2222
ptp udp-egress source-ip 12.0.0.2 destination-ip 12.0.0.1
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
ptp udp-egress destination-mac 2222-3333-2222
ptp udp-egress source-ip 15.0.0.1 destination-ip 15.0.0.2
#
return

l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
clock bits-type 1pps-tod in bits0
#
ptp enable
ptp device-type bc
ptp freq-sync
ptp clock-source bits0 on
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
ptp udp-egress destination-mac 0000-1111-2222
ptp udp-egress source-ip 10.0.0.1 destination-ip 10.0.0.2
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
ptp udp-egress destination-mac 1111-2222-1111
ptp udp-egress source-ip 11.0.0.1 destination-ip 11.0.0.2
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
clock bits-type 1pps-tod in bits0
#
ptp enable
ptp device-type bc
ptp freq-sync
ptp clock-source bits0 on
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
ptp udp-egress destination-mac 0000-1111-1111
ptp udp-egress source-ip 10.0.0.2 destination-ip 10.0.0.1
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism pdelay
ptp udp-egress destination-mac 1111-2222-3333
ptp udp-egress source-ip 12.0.0.1 destination-ip 12.0.0.2
#
return
12.9.3 Example for Configuring Clock Synchronization Through
Multicast MAC-Encapsulation 1588v2 Packets in Delay Mechanism
Serving as a clock synchronization protocol, 1588v2 can transmit frequency signals and time
signals of BITS servers across an entire network, which achieves clock synchronization between
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
247
the wireless bearer network and wireless access network. By default, S9300s encapsulate 1588v2
packets in multicast MAC mode. For NodeBs supporting multicast MAC-encapsulated 1588v2
packets, you can configure all clocks of an entire network as BCs to simplify the operation of
clock synchronization on the entire network.
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 12-10, PE1 and PE2 are core devices on a bearer network and CE1 and CE2
are edge devices on a wireless access network. PE1 and PE2, functioning as the external BITS
clock sources for BCs, advertise clock and time information to CE1 and CE2. CE1 and CE2,
functioning as BCs, synchronize clock signals with the BITS through 1588v2 and send 1588v2
packets carrying the frequency and time information to their attached NodeBs. In addition, CE2
can send E1 signals carrying frequency information to non-1588v2-aware NodeB 2 for restoring
frequency synchronization.
Figure 12-10 Networking diagram of clock synchronization on a network through multicast
MAC-encapsulated 1588v2 packets
BITS
NodeB1
with 1588v2
NodeB3
with 1588v2
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/1
GE1/0/1
BITS
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/1
NodeB2
without 1588v2
PE1 PE2 CE1 CE2
E1
GE1/0/0
GE1/0/1

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Connect PE1 and PE2 to BITS clock sources.
2. Configure PE1, PE2, CE1, and CE2 as BCs.
NOTE
1588v2 packets are encapsulated in the default multicast MAC mode.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l 1588 link delay measurement mechanism: Delay
l MAC address of each NodeB
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
248
Procedure
Step 1 Configure PE1 and PE2 so that they can import BITS clock signals through their clock interfaces.
For the detailed configurations, see the section Example for Configuring the BITS as the PTP
Clock Source.
Step 2 Configure PE1 and PE2 as BCs.
# Configure PE1.
<PE1> system-view
[PE1] ptp enable
[PE1] ptp device-type bc
[PE1] ptp freq-sync
[PE1] clock bits-type 1pps-tod in bits0
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp delay-mechanism delay
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp enable
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp delay-mechanism delay
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp enable
[PE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
# Configure PE2.
<PE2> system-view
[PE2] ptp enable
[PE2] ptp device-type bc
[PE1] ptp freq-sync
[PE1] clock bits-type 1pps-tod in bits0
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp delay-mechanism delay
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp enable
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[PE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp delay-mechanism delay
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp enable
[PE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
Step 3 Configure CE1 and CE2 as BCs so that they can synchronize the clock and time information
with that of PE1 and PE2 and advertise the information to NodeB 1 and NodeB 3.
# Configure CE1.
<CE1> system-view
[CE1] ptp enable
[CE1] ptp device-type bc
[CE1] ptp freq-sync
[CE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp delay-mechanism delay
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp enable
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
[CE1] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp delay-mechanism delay
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp enable
[CE1-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
# Configure CE2.
<CE2> system-view
[CE2] ptp enable
[CE2] ptp device-type bc
[CE2] ptp freq-sync
[CE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/0
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp delay-mechanism delay
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] ptp enable
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/0] quit
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
249
[CE2] interface gigabitethernet 1/0/1
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp delay-mechanism delay
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] ptp enable
[CE2-GigabitEthernet1/0/1] quit
Step 4 Verify the configuration.
After the preceding configurations, CE1 and CE2 can trace the clock and time information of
PE1 and PE2. Take the display on CE1 as an example. Run the display ptp all command. You
can view information about 1588v2 synchronization.
<CE1> display ptp all
Device config info
------------------------------------------------------------------
PTP state :enabled Domain value :0
Slave only :no Device type :BC
Static BMC :no Local clock ID :00e0fcfffe171112
PTP freq-sync :yes
BMC run info
------------------------------------------------------------------
Grand clock ID :001882fffe77c2cf
Receive number :GigabitEthernet1/0/0
Parent clock ID :001882fffe1b1bf4
Parent portnumber :1024
Priority1 :128 Priority2 :128
Step removed :1 Clock accuracy :32
Clock class :6 Time Source :32
UTC Offset :0 UTC Offset Valid :False
Time Scale :PTP Time Traceable :True
Leap :None Frequence Traceable:True
Port info
Name State Delay-mech Ann-timeout Type Domain
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GigabitEthernet1/0/0 slave delay 9 BC 0
Clock source info
Clock Pri1 Pri2 Accuracy Class TimeSrc Signal Switch Direction In-Status
------------------------------------------------------------------------
local 128 128 0x31 187 0xa0 - - - -
bits0 6 6 0x20 187 0x20 none off -/- abnormal
bits1 6 6 0x20 187 0x20 none off -/- abnormal
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of CE1
#
sysname CE1
#
ptp enable
ptp device-type bc
ptp freq-sync
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ptp delay-mechanism delay
ptp enable
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
ptp delay-mechanism delay
ptp enable
#
return
l Configuration file of CE2
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
250
#
sysname CE2
#
ptp enable
ptp device-type bc
ptp freq-sync
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ptp delay-mechanism delay
ptp enable
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
ptp delay-mechanism delay
ptp enable
#
return
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
#
clock bits-type 1pps-tod in bits0
#
ptp enable
ptp device-type bc
ptp freq-sync
ptp clock-source bits0 on
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism delay
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism delay
#
return
l Configuration file of PE2
#
sysname PE2
#
clock bits-type 1pps-tod in bits0
#
ptp enable
ptp device-type bc
ptp freq-sync
ptp clock-source bits0 on
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/0
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism delay
#
interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1
ptp enable
ptp delay-mechanism delay
#
return
Quidway S9300 Terabit Routing Switch
Configuration Guide - Device Management 12 PTP Configuration
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
251

Вам также может понравиться